Vector Reference Guide

Enter Syntax

Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. Web: [Link] Tel: +972-9-7446555

9 Hanagar St. Neve Neeman B Industrial Zone Email: info@[Link] Fax: +972-9-766515
Hod Hasharon, 45421, Israel
Documentation version 2.3 - December 2005
Copyright © 2003 Compulite Systems (2000) Ltd. All rights reserved.
This documentation is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
This document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution and
decompilation. No part of this product or document may be reproduced in any form by any means without the prior
express written authorization of Compulite and its licensors (if any). The content of this document is furnished for
informational use only and is subject to change without notice. Compulite assumes no responsibility or liability for
errors or inaccuracies that may appear in this book.

Document Revision History

Documentation Version 2.3 December 2005 s/w version 3.11

Documentation Version 2.2 May 2005 s/w version 3.10

Documentation Version 2.1 November 2004 s/w version 3.09

Documentation Version 2.0 October 2004 s/w version 3.08

Table of Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Getting started ................................................................ 1
Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Chapter 1: Setting up Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Vector’s back panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Setting up Vector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Connecting external screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Calibrating touch screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Adjusting desk lights and LCD displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Connecting external devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Language options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Software installation and upgrade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7

Chapter 2: General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Vector operation modes and programming syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Tracking mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Compulite mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Programming syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
The user interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Using the trackball for mousing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Scrolling and navigating spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Using console keys in window mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Command line and system status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Progress bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Numeric entry default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Clearing the command line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
System indications bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Editors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Universal procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Selecting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Adding text tags to objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Deleting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
ii

Examining objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Copying, cutting, and pasting, objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Storing changes and updating objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Using undo and redo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Vector Default Times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Getting Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19

Chapter 3: Displays and Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Basic display layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Setting up and saving display layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Opening new view panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Identifying the active pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Setting a default exam pane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Opening new windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Navigating displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Locking windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Full screen window display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Dialog boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Saving and loading display layouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Show node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Patch node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Live node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Playback node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Editor Tools node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Menus and toolbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
File menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
View menu and toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Tools menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Format menu and toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
LiveMode menu and toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Window menu and display toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Attachment menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Editor Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Wheel Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Setting up Soft Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Defining soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Paging soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Soft key display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Context sensitive soft keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Playback displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Grid properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Customizing column headers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Customizing grid appearance for specific display panes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
 III

Chapter 4: Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Patch Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Patch manager toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
The patch manager workspace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Working in the Patch Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Importing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Creating fixtures and patching DMX addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Creating and patching fixtures with scrollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Patching fixtures for use in editor fixture mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Applying the patch and exiting the patch manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Modifying the patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Deleting fixtures and clearing patch assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Modifying fixture properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Changing a device setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Changing DMX channel properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Patch functions in the editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Patching to DMX addresses in the editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Test channels, dimmers, and DMX offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Examining the patch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Using park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Examining patch information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

Chapter 5: Selecting and Controlling Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Selecting fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Quick selection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Interactive fixture selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Selecting fixtures via the topo map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Command line numerical default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Working with groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Automatically generating groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Storing groups manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Adding text tags to groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Deleting groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Examining groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Copying groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Modifying groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Output location color code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Resetting the editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Default stage values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Spot ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Controlling parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Parameter wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Parameter modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Setting parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Quick value keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
iv

Flip pan and tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Changing pan and tilt orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Parameter grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Resetting parameter values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Applying last value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Selecting fixtures using Active . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Selection sources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Selecting without specifying a source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Conditional selections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Chapter 6: Programming and Updating Cues and QLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Working with QLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Opening new QLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Adding text tags to QLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Deleting QLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Examining QLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Copying QLists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Working with cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Storing cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Opening new QLists when storing cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Using soft keys to store cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Using store options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Adding text tags to cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Deleting cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Examining cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Viewing a QList track sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Examining fixture usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Copying cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Modifying cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Updating cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Modifying cues that are not output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Releasing fixtures or parameters from cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Using Delta . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Programming and modification options in tracking mode operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Edit cue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Load cue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Load state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Skip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Back track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Unblock ( . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Cue only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Loading cues to the editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Fade times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Deleting delay times . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
 V

Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Working with loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Playing back loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Linking Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Working with the fan feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Temporary Cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Working with temporary cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Using the faders in channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Working in channel mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Blind Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Using the blind editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Chapter 7: Playback Devices and QList Playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

About playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
A/B crossfader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Qkeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Playback control key LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Playback priorities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Mapping specific playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Loading and freeing playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Master playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Master playback color code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fading cues out of sequence on the master playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Changing the GO key function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Fading cues on the playback devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Playback device controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
General master . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Playback displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Playback device displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Setting Up Playback Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Playback Properties dialog box - Assignment Properties tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Playback Properties dialog box - Playback Definitions tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Controlling fade rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Using the faders for rate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Using wheels for rate control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Using the rate mode toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Loop playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Exiting loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Chases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Setting chases and chase properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Programming chases . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Controlling chase rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
vi

Snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Active snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Snap modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Storing a new snap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Triggering snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Modifying snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Naming snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Deleting snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Examining snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Copying snaps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Chapter 8: Saving, Loading, and Printing Show Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167

Saving Shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Autosave . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Loading shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Loading specific objects and patch information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
File conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Printing shows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Chapter 9: Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

About libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Working with libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Automatically generating libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Storing libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Adding text tags to libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Deleting libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Examining libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Copying libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Using library storage options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Fixture and device specific libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Library patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Filtering libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Editing libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Using libraries for programming cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Chapter 10: Macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Working with macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Storing macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Adding text tags to macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Deleting macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Examining macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Copying macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Triggering macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Automatically trigger macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Triggering macros using MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
 VII

Chapter 11: Topo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Working with topo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Setting stage dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
The topo toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Topo grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Placing stage elements and fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Modifying fixture properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Deleting fixtures or elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Manipulating the topo view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
Printing the topo map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

Chapter 12: Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

About effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Effects editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Fan and selection order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Storing effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Movement attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Primitives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Fanning parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Time attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Duty Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Synchronizing effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Releasing effects from cues or from the editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Chapter 13: Advanced Editing and Programming Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Pre-positioning parameters with Look Ahead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Using Highlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Using lowlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Using highlight and lowlight palettes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Using highlight to update libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Using Rem Dim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Using Sneak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Dark parameter positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
LookAhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Mark cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Force Black cues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Pre-positioning examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Using Matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Setting up matrixes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
viii

Programming cues using the matrix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Parameter Fade Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Chapter 14: Advanced Setup Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

System settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Behavior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Topo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Chapter 15: Multimedia Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243

File attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Attachment viewers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Working with attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Receiving video transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Multi-media Server integration - Hippotizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Appendix A: Backups and Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249

Master and slave consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Status display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Connecting the consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Configuring the slave console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Rules governing master/slave switchover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Remote panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Setting up the network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
DMX Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Art-Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253

Appendix B: The Vector Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

About the Vector network configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Separating devices into networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
IP address configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Real time network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Outgoing network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
General use network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
External panel wings, DMX boards and remotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Appendix C: Automated playback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

About timelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Working with MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
MIDI settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
MIDI macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
 IX

Playback operations using MSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263

MIDI tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Appendix D: The Device Builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267

About the device builder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Building and editing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Mapping parameter types to their DMX offsets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Editing parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Configuring the control parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Saving and importing devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276

Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Console keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Other console controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Editor toolbar modes and buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Default buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Active mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Cue mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Delta mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Dimmer (patch) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Every (selection filter) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Fan mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Fixture selection mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Library mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Loop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Macro mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Pan/Tilt mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Parameter (setting levels) mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Profile mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Rate mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Store options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Time mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Timeline mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Shift pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
x
Introduction

Getting started
Ease of use has been the watchword for Vector ‘s development team. However, as Vector controls
complex lighting rigs as well as simpler rigs, console operation may also be complex sometimes. The
purpose of this guide is to help you become a skilled Vector programmer.

However, as Vector controls complex lighting rigs as well as simpler rigs, console operation may also
be complex sometimes. Experienced Compulite programmers will find much in Vector that is familiar.
We recommend that you use the Quick Start Guide to familiarize yourself with Vector’s unique
capabilities.

New and experienced users will find the General Information chapter useful. The General Information
chapter describes the user interface, windows use, color code conventions, and standard procedures’
syntax that is common to many show elements.

This guide generally follows your work flow, from patching through programming cues to playback.

Text conventions
The actual keys on the console panel are referred to as KEYS. Panel KEYS are in BOLD CAPS.
The keys on the touch screens are referred to as BUTTONS. Touch screen BUTTONS are BOLD,
ITALICIZED CAPS.

Command line refers to area at the bottom of the screen where the command chain is displayed
and error messages appear. Command line text is in italics.
Dialog box captions, window titles, and field names appear in this font.

# refers to numbers entered on the numeric keypad.

In operation sequences, optional keys or buttons appear in parentheses. Example: SPOT # ( #)
@ 65.

Key presses are separated by commas when operation sequences written in a single line.
Example: SPOT, #, ,#, ACTIVE
When + appears between key or button names, it means: Press THIS (and) THAT at the same
time. Example: SHIFT + FREE. Generally used only in conjunction with shift pairs.
The term Tap is used for touch or click when referring to the touch screen buttons.
Fixture is used for any lighting device.
Channel is a one parameter (usually dimmer) lighting device.
Spot is a multiparameter lighting device.
PBD stands for playback device.
MPB stands for master playback device
Compulite

SKs refers to Soft Keys.

Desk, console, and system are used interchangeably.
Cells refer to the smallest information unit, such as one parameter of a moving device, as
displayed in spreadsheet format.

Notes: The screen captures appearing in this guide may not look exactly like the screens on your
Vector. In the interest of visual clarity, a different skin was used for the guides’s illustrations. The
content of the illustrations is identical to the content seen on Vector.

2
Chapter 1 Setting up Vector
This chapter contains the following sections:
Setting up Vector (see page 3)
Connecting external screens (see page 4)
Calibrating touch screens (see page 5)
Adjusting desk lights and LCD displays (see page 6)
Connecting external devices (see page 7)
Language options (see page 7)
Settings (see page 7)
Software installation and upgrade (see page 7)

Vector’s back panel

Figure 1: Vector (Blue) rear panel

Setting up Vector
1 Place the console on a clean, stable, and level surface.
2 Make sure the voltage selection switch, located on the power supply, is correctly set to
230V AC or 110V AC.
3 Connect the Vector to the mains supply using the cable supplied.
4 Connect any peripherals to their connectors on the rear panel. All connectors are labelled
with names and standard icons.

3
Compulite
Chapter 1

Figure 2: Detail Vector rear panel - AC input connector

To power up Vector

1 Switch on the power, using the switch located on the power supply on Vector’s back panel.
The soft switch located on the front of the console is lit.
2 Open the door, on the front of the console, protecting the soft switch and press the soft
switch once. Wait for Vector to complete boot up.
3 Connect the DMX cables to the appropriate ports.

IMPORTANT! MAKE SURE the voltage selector is set to the voltage that is correct for
your mains power supply.

Connecting external screens

External touch screen displays can be connected on the USB and Comm connectors.

Figure 3: Display Properties dialog box

Vector Red: The built in touch screens are screens 2, 3, and 4. The external displays are numbers 1,
5, and 6.

4
 VECTOR
Setting up Vector

Vector Blue: The built in touch screens are screens 2 and 3. The external displays are numbers 1, 4,
5, and 6.

Vector Green: The built in touch screens is screen 2. The external display is number 1.

Newly connected displays show the Vector [Link] must open a new window for the new display.
See “Opening new windows” page 24

To connect external displays

1 Go to Tools menu Settings. The System Settings dialog box opens.

2 Tap the Hardware tab.
3 Tap Display Settings.
4 Tap IDENTIFY to see how the monitors are numbered.
5 Right click on a number for the external monitor and, from the fly-out menu, click
ATTACHED.
6 Tap APPLY.

To orient the mouse and the display screens

Click on and drag the numbered screens, so they represent the physical order of the displays.

Calibrating touch screens

You may find that occasionally the touch screens require calibration.

To calibrate the touch screens

1 Open the System Settings dialog box through the Tools menu.
2 Tap the Hardware tab.
3 Tap Touch Screen Calibration.
4 Tap the center of the x that appears in the upper left corner of the display.
5 Tap the center of the x that appears in the lower right corner of the display.
6 Continue steps 4 - 5 for each screen.

OR
1 Press SCROLL WIN to enable windows mode.
2 Press @ to open the Start menu.
3 On the task bar, double click on the Pointer Device Settings icon.
The Pointer Device Properties dialog box opens. if the icon is not visible, click the arrows
to expand the task bar.
4 In the Pointer Device Properties dialog box, select a display from the Installed Devices list.

5
Compulite
Chapter 1

Figure 4: Pointer Device Settings icon

5 Tap CALIBRATE.
6 Tap the center of the x that appears in the upper left corner of the display.
7 Tap the center of the x that appears in the lower right corner of the display.
8 Continue steps 4 - 7 for each screen.
9 Tap OK.

Adjusting desk lights and LCD displays

You can adjust the brightness for the handle lights and desklights. The brightness and backlight for
the master playback LCD backlight is also adjustable

To adjust the handle lights

1 Press SETUP.
2 On the Editor toolbar, tap DESK LIGHTS.
3 Use the DESK LIGHT wheel to set the brightness.

To adjust the auxiliary lights

There are manual adjustment knobs on the back panel next to the auxiliary light connectors.

To adjust the master playback LCD display

1 Press SETUP.
2 On the Editor toolbar, tap DESK LIGHTS.
3 Use the LCD BRIGHTNESS wheel to set the brightness.
4 Use the LCD BACKLIGHT wheel to adjust contrast.

6
 VECTOR
Setting up Vector

Connecting external devices

External pointing devices, such as a mouse, joystick or trackball, can be connected to the back
panel USB or PS-2 connectors. It is recommended to have an external pointing device connected.
Some functions are easier using a mouse.

Vector comes equipped with a mini keyboard in the slide out tray under the panel. Keyboards are
connected at the USB ports or the PS-2 keyboard port on Vector’s back panel.

Settings
General system defaults for Vector shows are defined in the System Settings dialog box. You can
customize any of these settings. See “System settings” page 233

General window settings can be changed through Start menu Control Panel Display.

Set the Vector’s clock through: Start menu Control Panel Date/Time.

Language options
Vector’s menus, tool tips, and dialog boxes can be localized so Vector speaks your language. For
information on localization contact your local Compulite distributor.

Software installation and upgrade

Vector application software is installed in drive C:\ and D:\. Drive C:\ contains windows system
files and the Windows XP installation. These files are locked and may not be changed. Drive D:\
contains Vector’s system files, show files, layout files, and visualizers.

These instructions assume:

1. Vector is running
2. An alphanumeric keyboard is connected
3. An external mouse is connected.

Before installing new software, we recommend saving back up copies of your shows and any
customized devices.

To upgrade software

1 Access the Task Bar by pressing the Start key on the Vector Keyboard.
2 Right click the RT Interface icon and select Exit RT Interface.

IMPORTANT! After this step, you will not be able to use the track ball as a mouse.
Continue with an external mouse.

7
Compulite
Chapter 1

3 Exit the Vector application.

4 Remove the Compulite Vector program using the Add/Remove Program tool in window’s
Control Panel.
5 Delete the Compulite Vector folder in C:/Program Files.
6 Proceed to install the new software using the new software package downloaded from
Compulite’s FTP site.
7 Extract the “[Link]” folder to D:\Vector Data.\Vector Installations.
8 Run the [Link] file to start the installation wizard.
9 Tap NEXT on first Screen.
10 On Setup Type choose the type of installation.
Example: If you have a RED Vector choose Red Vector.
11 Continue tapping NEXT until you get the Installation progress message.
12 When it becomes available, press FINISH on the Compulite Vector Setup wizard.
The new Vector Console program is now installed.
13 Run the program from the Start Menu.
When the application starts it automatically performs a real time software update.
14 When the update is complete, the run time status is displayed as a green check mark in the
status bar.
15 Refresh windows by clicking the View Refresh.
16 When the console is running, verify that the IP address is correct and your defaults in the
System Settings Dialog box are correct.

To shutdown Vector

1 Press the soft switch located on the front of the console.

2 Tap Turn Off in the Turn Off Computer box. Vector shuts down.

IMPORTANT! It is strongly recommended to use a UPS (minimum 600VA) to protect

the console and your work.

8
Chapter 2 General Information
This chapter contains the following sections:
Vector operation modes and programming syntax (see page 9)
The user interface (see page 11)
Using the trackball for mousing (see page 11)
Scrolling and navigating spreadsheets (see page 12)
Command line and system status (see page 13)
Selecting objects (see page 16)
Adding text tags to objects (see page 16)
Deleting objects (see page 16)
Copying, cutting, and pasting, objects (see page 18)
Examining objects (see page 17)
Storing changes and updating objects (see page 18)
Using undo and redo (see page 19)

Vector operation modes and programming syntax

Vector has two operation modes:
Tracking mode
Compulite mode

Vector offers two syntaxes for programming procedures.

Action syntax
Enter (Broadway style) syntax

The operation mode and programming syntax are set in the System Settings dialog box Behavior
tab. See “System settings” page 233

Tracking mode
In tracking mode, Vector stores only the changes or moves from one cue to the next. Parameter
levels that do not change are tracked through cues following the cue where the level was originally
set. Levels that are being tracked are not stored again in each cue. Thus there are two types of
parameter values:
Hard values (new or changed values) - values that are stored in the current cue.
Tracked values - unchanged values that are tracked from an earlier cue.

9
Compulite
Chapter 2

After storing a cue, the editor is released.

This table shows the total output and the levels that are recorded in each cue:

Console output (lighting state) Information recorded in each cue

Channel 1 2 3 1 2 3

CUE 1 50 FL 40 50 FL 40
CUE 2 25 FL FL 25 FL
CUE 3 25 80 FL 80

Note that only the new or changed values are stored in each cue.

Sometimes you want to cancel all tracking values, for instance, when starting a new scene. Block
cues are used to reset the tracking, Block cues must be specifically programmed.
See “Programming and modification options in tracking mode operation” page 105

The benefits of tracking mode are:

Tracking changes throughout a series of cues.
Example: Assume that in cue 1 you set the backlight wash at 60%. The hard value is stored in
cue 1 and this level does not change during the entire scene, therefore the level in cue 1 tracks
through all the cues in the scene. After programming all the cues, you see that the back light
level is too low. You need to change the level only in cue 1. The new value is tracked through
all the subsequent cues.
Running simultaneous cues.
Example: The scene is an interior night scene with room practicals on. As dawn breaks and
natural light fills the room, the characters switch off the practicals. How does tracking mode
help you set up this cue progression? Program one cue that is running a slow fade for the
general interior lighting. Program other cues cue that snap off the practicals. Assume that the
slow fade is cue 10 and the practicals off cues are 11 and 12. While the fade to cue 10 is still
running, you can give go commands to cues 11 and 12 without interrupting cue 10’s fade.

Vector automatically maintains the cue state when playing back cues out of sequence, as often
happens during rehearsals.

Compulite mode
Compulite mode is a cue only mode, where all fixtures and values that comprise the lighting state
are stored in each cue.

The editor is not released after storing a cue. You can continue programming cues based on the
editor group or reset the editor. See “Resetting the editor” page 72.

10
 VECTOR
General Information

Programming syntax

Action syntax Enter syntax

Output convention

• Parameter levels that are set using @, are • Parameter levels that are set using @, are not
immediately output. output until ENTER is pressed.
• Parameter levels set using the wheels, FULL, • Parameter levels set using the wheels, FULL,
ZERO, or ON are immediately output. ZERO, or ON are immediately output.

Procedure syntax

Generally, action syntax is: Generally, enter syntax is:

1. Select items. 1. Select items.
2. Select the object. 2. Select the operation.
3. Press STORE. 3. Select the object.
4. Press ENTER.
Example: Store a group. Example: Store a group.
1. Select fixtures (the items). 1. Select fixtures (the items).
2. Press GROUP and choose a group number 2. Press STORE (the operation).
(the object). 3. Press GROUP and choose a group number
3. Press STORE (the operation). The group is (the object).
stored.
4. Press ENTER. The group is stored.

The user interface

Vector uses a combination of command line and graphical user interface.

Keypresses and button taps are entered to the command line, showing a clear progression of the
current programming sequence.

Vector also uses a graphical user interface (GUI) and many operations can be done using the touch
screen buttons. Vector's graphical user interface includes menus, toolbars, file trees, and dialog
boxes that make it easy to find your way around and get things done. Your pointing device can be
an external mouse, connected at the mouse port on the back panel, or the trackball set to mouse
function. The display is completely flexible. You can set up the GUI to display what you need at
each stage of your work.

Using the trackball for mousing

Vector's dual mode trackball is used for setting pan/tilt values and as a mouse. The keys located at
the lower left of the trackball function as right and left mouse buttons.

11
Compulite
Chapter 2

To set the trackball for pan and tilt editing

The default trackball mode controls pan and tilt. Make sure MOUSE is not enabled.

To set the trackball for mousing

Press MOUSE. The MOUSE LED flashes. The trackball is now available as a pointer device.

Scrolling and navigating spreadsheets

Playback and live displays as shown in spreadsheet format and soft key displays can also be toggled
to show information in spreadsheet form. The vertical wheel, which by default controls dimmer
intensity, can also be used as a scroll wheel in spreadsheet displays.

The extreme right encoder can also be used to as a scroll wheel in spreadsheet and soft key displays.

To use the wheel for scrolling

Press SCROLL WIN. The SCROLL WIN LED flashes.

To navigate in spreadsheets

Press SCROLL WIN. Use the arrow keys above the trackball to move from cell to cell.

Using console keys in window mode

When the SCROLL WIN key is active, the console number pad and other console keys can be used
to enter numbers and traverse dialog box fields. Console keys that are active in scroll win mode are:

Keyboard Keyboard
Console key Console key
equivalent equivalent

+ plus sign CE Backspace

— minus sign DELETE Delete
/ slash EFFECT Ctrl

dot, decimal point ENTER Enter

Tab NEXT Page Up

12
 VECTOR
General Information

Keyboard Keyboard
Console key Console key
equivalent equivalent

@ Open Start menu SHIFT Shift

0-9 numbers 0 -9 PREVIOUS Page Down

arrow keys arrow keys

SCROLL WIN is automatically enabled when working in dialog boxes. SCROLL WIN is automati-
cally released when exiting a dialog box.

IMPORTANT! When SCROLL WIN is enabled, the numeric keypad is disabled for
fixture editing and the wheel cannot control intensity. The message Windows Mode
Active!!! overlays the command line.

Command line and system status

The command line is the area where commands, entered using the console keys or touch buttons,
are displayed. Each screen has a command line.

The command line shows:

The active command sequence
Real time connection status
System clock
General master status

Figure 5: Main screen command line

Progress bar
A progress bar is displayed on the command line for operations that may take some time. The
progress bar is displayed when:
Opening shows
Saving shows
Automatic saves are in progress
Uploading data to the real time processor
Uploading software to the real time processor

The bar shows the operation in progress. it appears to the left of the real time connection status.

13
Compulite
Chapter 2

Numeric entry default

The command line can be set for a numeric default selection; the first number pressed is recognized
as a default selection. Example: The default is Channel. Pressing 5, on the numeric keypad, selects
channel 5. It is unnecessary to press CHANNEL before entering the number selection.

The default command line options are:

Spot
Channel
Group
QList
Cue
Dim

To set the command line numeric default

Example: Set the command line default to Spot.

Press SPOT twice. Spot is now the numeric selection default. When selecting spots, choose
only the spot number.

Clearing the command line

You can reset the entire command line to its idle state or regressively clear the entries in the
command line.

To clear each entry (backspace)

Press CLEAR. The last entry is cleared. Continue pressing CLEAR. Each press clears the last
entry in the command line.

To reset the command line

Press SHIFT + CLEAR. All the entries in the command line are cleared and the command line
is reset to idle.

Note: This does not clear the last selection from wheel control.

System indications bar

The Indications bar shows system status information. You can choose to show or hide the Indica-
tions bar.

The system indications bar shows:

Console operation mode (Tracking or Compulite)
Procedure syntax (Action or Enter)
MIDI (enabled or disabled)
MSC (enabled or disabled)

14
 VECTOR
General Information

Active snap
Active Editor
QList on the master playback
Last stored cue
Master/slave status (if configured for master/slave operation)
SMPTE/TimeLine clock (when SMPTE is enabled)

Figure 6: Indications bar

To display the Indications bar

1 Open the View menu.

2 Tap Indications Bar.
The Indications bar is now displayed.
3 Drag it to dock at any convenient place.

This is saved with your display layout.

Editors
Vector has 7 live editors. The editors can simultaneously contain fixture selections and parameter
levels. Fixtures may be active in more than one editor at the same time.
Parameter levels, in the active editor, are displayed on a white field.
Parameter levels, in the editors that are not active, are displayed on a dark field.

Pressing RESET resets only the active editor.

The active editor is displayed in the (System) Indications Bar.

To switch active editors

1 Press EDITOR.
2 Press a number (1 - 7), on the keypad.
3 Press ENTER.
The selected editor is now active. All editing is done only in the active editor.

15
Compulite
Chapter 2

Universal procedures
Selecting objects, copying and pasting objects, adding text tags to objects, deleting objects, and
modifying objects, (such as cues, QLists, groups, snaps, libraries, and macros) follow the same
basic procedure and invoke the same dialog boxes.

More detailed explanations appear in sections dealing with specific objects.

Selecting objects
You can select cues, QLists, snaps, groups, libraries, macros, channels, or spots using a key
sequence or soft keys.

To select objects using console keys

Press the object key (CUE, QLIST, SNAP, MACRO, etc.) and enter in its number on the
keypad.

To select objects using soft keys

Activate the appropriate soft key tab and tap the object’s number.

Adding text tags to objects

All show objects can be labelled with meaningful text tags.

To add text tags to objects

1 Press TEXT.
2 Select the object.
3 Press ENTER.
The Text dialog box opens.
4 Use the keyboard to type the name.
5 Press ENTER or tap OK.
The dialog box closes.

OR
Immediately after storing the object, press TEXT and follow steps 4 and 5.

Deleting objects
The same procedure is used to delete cues, groups, snaps, and all other show elements.

A warning/confirmation box is always displayed for this operation.

16
 VECTOR
General Information

Figure 7: Delete operation confirmation

To delete objects

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the object.
3 Press ENTER.
The Delete warning and confirmation box opens.
4 Tap DELETE or ENTER to confirm the operation.
Tap CANCEL to exit the operation without deleting the object.

Examining objects
Lists of objects and specific objects can be viewed.

To view a list of objects

Example: View a list of groups

Press EXAM and press GROUP.

OR
Toggle the group soft keys to spreadsheet view by tapping . A list of groups is displayed
in the active pane.

To examine a specific object

Example: Examine group 5.

1 Press EXAM.
2 Select group 5.
3 Press ENTER. The contents of the group are displayed in the active pane or the designated
exam pane.

OR
1 View the groups in spreadsheet format.
If the group tab is in soft key format, toggle to spreadsheet view.
2 Double click on group 5. The contents of the group are displayed in the active pane.

17
Compulite
Chapter 2

Copying, cutting, and pasting, objects

The copy, paste, and cut functions work similarly to these functions in personal computers.

A copied or cut object is placed on the internal clipboard. It can be pasted multiple times. The
object remains on the clipboard until replaced by copying or cutting another object.

Pasted objects that were put on the clipboard using COPY are tagged Copy of (source object). You
can, of course, change the text tag. Pasted objects that were put on the clipboard using CUT retain
their original text.

The COPY key’s LED shows the clipboard status:

LED on - There is an object on the clipboard.
LED off - There is nothing on the clipboard.

To copy and paste objects

1 Select the source object.

2 Press COPY.
3 Select the target object.
4 Press PASTE.

Storing changes and updating objects

When storing changes to cues, groups, snaps, and libraries, the Store Options dialog box opens
directly after pressing STORE This dialog box acts as a warning, letting you know that the object
exists, and provides store options.

Figure 8: The Store Options dialog box

The store options are:
Overwrite - The object is replaced with the active editor.
Update - Opens the Update dialog box.
Release - Used to remove fixtures from groups and libraries.
Create New - Creates a new QList. The new QList number is the last QList incremented by 1.
This option is only available when modifying cues. See “Temporary Cues” page 118

Note: When modifying cues, press UPDATE instead of STORE. See “Using the Update
dialog box options” page 98

To store changes to objects

Example: Store changes to a cue.

1 Select fixtures and assign values.

18
 VECTOR
General Information

2 Press ENTER.
3 Select the target cue.
4 Press STORE.
The Object Exists dialog box opens.
5 Tap OVERWRITE, UPDATE, or RELEASE.

Using undo and redo

The undo feature provides a regressive restoration of previous editor values. It also restores deleted
objects, such as cues, snaps, libraries, etc.

To restore a previous editor value or restore a deleted object

Press UNDO.

To redo an undo

Press SHIFT + UNDO.

Vector Default Times

You can set default fade times for a number of operations.

For details, See “Timing” page 237

Getting Help
Vector has on line help for both Action syntax and Enter (Broadway style) syntax.

To open help

1 Open the Help menu.

2 Tap Context.
The on-line help file opens. Browse according to topic, index entries, or search.

Note: Choose the help for the syntax that you are using.

19
Compulite
Chapter 2

20
Chapter 3 Displays and Menus
On start up the touch screens open with basic display layouts. The layouts are completely customi-
zable and you can change the layouts to suit your show and work habits. We recommend that you
familiarize yourself with the layouts supplied before changing them.

This chapter contains the following sections:

Basic display layouts (see page 21)
Setting up and saving display layouts (see page 22)
Workspace (see page 26)
Menus and toolbars (see page 30)
Editor Toolbar (see page 37)
Wheel Assignments (see page 38)
Setting up Soft Keys (see page 38)
Playback displays (see page 40)
Grid properties (see page 40)

Basic display layouts

Figure 9: Main Screen - basic layout

Menu bar - The menu bar appears on all display screens. The menu bar can be hidden to maxi-
mize display real estate. See “Window menu and display toolbar” page 36.

21
Compulite
Chapter 3

Soft Keys - Soft keys access most programming and components. Use the pane splitter to pile
soft keys on top of each other. When piled, a tab is automatically created for each set of soft
keys. Soft key elements are set using the workspace tree. The soft key view can be toggled to
show soft keys or a list of the relevant elements. See “Setting up Soft Keys” page 38.
Master playback - Shows the current and next cues running on the master playback and other
playback information according to the fields set in the Grid Properties dialog box. See “Grid
properties” page 40
QList on master playback - Shows the cue sheet for the QList that is loaded to the master play-
back. The view is toggled to spreadsheet view.
Editor toolbar - The Editor toolbar is context sensitive, changing according to the current func-
tion. See “Editor Toolbar” page 37
Wheel Assignments - The wheel assignments display is context sensitive, changing in
response to the selected parameter type. See “Wheel Assignments” page 38

Figure 10: Screen 2 - basic layout

Spot display - Shows spots and their current output values. The live spot spreadsheet can be
modified in the Grid Properties dialog box.
Playback Wing -The playback wing display shows the QLists loaded, the current cue, the next
cue, and additional information for each playback device. The columns shown is set in the Grid
Properties dialog box. Playback displays include Playback Wing 1, Playback Wing 2, Play-
back AB, and the Master playback device.

Setting up and saving display layouts

Each screen has one general window, containing:
A title bar

22
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

The window control icons (shrink, maximize, minimize, close)

One window pane
Menu bar
Command line

You can show or hide the window title bar. Hiding the title bar maximizes display area real estate.

The window control icons are displayed with the title bar. If the title bar is hidden, the window
controls are not available.

To show/hide the title bar

Window Show/hide window Title.

Opening new view panes

A window can be split into multiple view panes. View panes can contain multiple tabs. The splitter
mechanism is used to segment the display area and create new view panes.

There are three options for segmenting the display area:

Split horizontally - split the active pane horizontally.
Split vertically - split the active pane vertically.
Add a page to an existing pane - open a new tab in the active pane.

Figure 11: Window Setup toolbar

Identifying the active pane

The splitters affect the active pane. The active pane has a light red frame. If the title bar is
displayed, the active pane’s title bar is dark red. Only one pane can be active at a time.

Paging and close controls for each pane appear on its title bar. A pane’s title bar can be shown or
hidden.

To activate a pane

Tap the pane or its tab.

To show/hide the pane title bar

Open the Window menu; Window Show title bar or press .

23
Compulite
Chapter 3

Setting a default exam pane

Exam displays open on the active pane. However, some panes, such as the Editor toolbar and Wheel
Assignments, do not support exam displays. A view pane or a tab in a view pane can be designated
as the default exam view in case the active pane does not support exams.

You can also set up a view pane or a tab in a view pane as the default exam display; whenever you
request an exam, the exam is always displayed in the same place.

To set the default exam view

Go to the menu bar. Tap Window Exam Use this view as default.

To activate the default exam view for all exams

Go to the menu bar. Tap Window Exam Always open exams on default view.

Opening new windows

If you have added monitors to Vector, you must open a new window and set up the display. New
windows open, in reduced size, on the main screen.

To open and dock a new window

1 Go to the Window menu and tap New. A new window opens on the main display screen.
2 Using the mouse, a stylus, or the trackball (set to the mouse option) drag the new window
to one of the display screens.
3 When the window is located on the display screen, maximize it.

Navigating displays
The display navigation toolbar is always open, appearing in the menu bar between the Attachment
menu and the Help menu.

Figure 12: The navigation toolbar

Locking windows
It is recommended to lock the windows. Locking the windows prevents accidentally moving or
resizing display elements.

To lock the windows

Go to the Windows menu: Windows Lock all.

OR

24
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

If the Window Set Up toolbar is displayed, tap .

Tip! Always display the lock icon to verify window lock status at a glance.

Full screen window display

To take advantage of the maximum display real estate, you can hide the elements that belong to the
general window:
Menu bar
Command line

When the full screen display is enabled, hiding the menu bar and command line, the Display Setup
toolbar is automatically displayed. This allows you to return the menu bar and command line.

To hide the general window elements

1 Go to the Window menu.

2 Tap . The menu bar is hidden.

To show the general window elements

Tap on the Display Setup toolbar.

Dialog boxes
Many of Vector’s features are controlled through dialog boxes. Dialog boxes always open in their
last position. If a Vector dialog box has been moved to an area where it is invisible or cannot be
grabbed, choosing Reset Dialog Position, under the Windows menu restores the dialog box to its
default location.

Note: This does not reset Windows’ dialog boxes, such as the Open and Save dialog
boxes.

Each time a dialog box opens, Vector automatically enables SCROLL WIN where you can use the
the console number pad and other console keys to enter numbers and traverse dialog box fields.
Exiting a dialog box automatically disables SCROLL WIN.

Saving and loading display layouts

Display layouts are saved in dedicated files. The extension for layout files is *.cfg

There are three default folders that may contain display layouts:
D:\Program Files\Compulite Vector\WorkDir\Show\Layout - This is the default location for
saving layouts for the current show. The contents of this folder are overwritten when starting a
new show.
D:\Program Files\Compulite Vector\Config\Layout - The layouts stored here are system
layouts. These are the basic layouts included in the Vector [Link] contents of this folder
are overwritten when upgrading Vector’s software.

25
Compulite
Chapter 3

D:\Program Files\Compulite Vector\My Layouts - The contents of this folder are never over-
written. Copy display layouts that you want to save and reuse to this folder.

To save a display layout

1 Tap Window Save Layout. The Save As dialog box opens to the default folder.
2 Optional - browse to a different folder
3 Type a name in the File Name field.
4 Tap OK. The display layout is saved.

To load a display layout

1 Tap Window Load Show Layout. The Open dialog box opens.
2 Select a layout from the list of *.cfg files.
3 Tap OK. The layout is loaded.

OR
1 Tap Window Load System Layout. The Open dialog box opens.
2 Select a layout from the list of *.cfg files.
3 Tap OK. The layout is loaded.

Tip! Back up your saved layouts by copying the files to a different location on the hard
disk.

Workspace
The Workspace is a browser that contains a navigable tree. Tapping on an item in the workspace
opens a tab on the active display pane.

The browser works like a file manager tree: a plus sign (+) indicates that there are sub nodes under
the main node. To expand a node, tap the plus sign (+). To collapse node, tap the minus sign (-).

26
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

Figure 13: The workspace tree

To display the Workspace

Tap .

Displays are in spreadsheet style grids, soft key format, or unique formats. The grid properties can
be changed in the Grid Properties dialog box. See “Grid properties” page 40

To collapse all nodes

Tap .

Show node
Tap Show to view general show information.

Figure 14: Show information

Expand Show to view nodes:

• QLists • Snaps • LookAhead Mask

• Libraries • Macros • Home Cue

• Groups • TimeLine

Each expansion shows more and more detail. All information is displayed in spreadsheet format.

To view cue sheets

Example: View QList1 and examine cue 1.

1 Expand Show.

27
Compulite
Chapter 3

2 Tap QLists.
A list of QLists is displayed in the active tab.
See:

3 Expand QLists.
4 Tap QList 1.
A list of cues in QList 1 and cue information is displayed in the active tab.

5 Expand QList 1 and tap Cue 1. The channels and spots in cue 1 are displayed with their
parameter values.
6 Expand Cue 1 and tap Spot or Channel. The details of the selected fixture set are displayed.

Patch node
Tap Patch to view the number of fixtures and types of devices used in the current show. See “The
patch manager workspace” page 46

Live node

Node Function

Channel Displays, in the active pane, the channels in the show and their current output.
Spot Displays, in the active pane, the spot in the show and their current output.
Matrix Displays the matrix programmer.
Matrix List Displays a list of all matrixes defined in the Patch Manager.
Topo View Displays the topo map as defined in the Patch Manager.

Tip! Use a large display pane for live channel and spot displays.
For Vector Blue, use one tab for spots and one for channels. See “Screen 2 - basic layout”
page 22.
For Vector Red, use one screen for channels and a playback wing, one for spots and a
playback wing display.

28
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

Playback node

Node Sub Nodes Function

Wing 1 Playback Faders Shows cue assignments and other information pertaining to
1 - 10 playback wing 1.
Selecting one of the playback devices, displays only the
selected device.
Wing 2 Playback Faders Shows cue assignments and other information pertaining to
11 - 20 playback wing 2.
Selecting one of the playback devices, displays only the
selected device.
QKeys 1 QKeys 1 - 10 Shows cue assignments and other information pertaining to
QKeys 1 - 10.
Selecting one of the QKeys, displays only the selected QKey.
QKeys 2 QKeys 11-20 Shows cue assignments and other information pertaining to
QKeys 11 - 20.
Selecting one of the QKeys, displays only the selected QKey.
A/B Shows cue assignments and other information pertaining to
the A/B playback. The display has side headers and includes
fade progress bars.
Cue Sheet Shows the cue sheet for the QList loaded on A/B. The
display format has top headers and fade progress bars.
Master Shows cue assignments and other information pertaining to
the Master playback.
Cue Sheet Shows the cue sheet for the QList loaded on the master play-
back device. The display format has top headers and fade
progress bars.
Attachment Attach and delete attachments to cues sequencing on the
master playback. Add text notes to an attachment.

Note: You can toggle between Qkeys and PB wing displays by pressing PB/QKEY.

Tip! Reserve a pane dedicated to the master playback. Another pane can be reserved for a
cue sheet that shows the list of cues and other cue information for the QList running on
the master playback.

29
Compulite
Chapter 3

Editor Tools node

Node Function

Context Sensitive The contents of a Context Sensitive tab or pane change according to the
current selection type. These soft keys can then be used to make selec-
tions. Example: Press CHANNEL. The CS soft keys are set to channel.
Tap soft keys to select channels.
Wheel Assignments Show/hide the Wheel Assignments display.
Editor Toolbar Show/hide the Editor Toolbar
Attachment Viewer Attach and delete attachments to show objects. Add text notes to an
attachment. See “Attachment viewers” page 243
Camera Viewer View images seen by the camera connected to Vector on the USB port
or via IP address. See “Receiving video transmission” page 245

Menus and toolbars

Vector’s menus contain save file and open file functions, show/hide options for toolbars, access to
setup dialog boxes, and all toolbars.

Showing a toolbar, floats the toolbar on the display. You can move and dock this toolbar. You can
customize the toolbar displays to permanently show frequently used icons.

To dock a floating toolbar

Grab the toolbar with the mouse, a stylus, or your finger and drag it under the menu bar.
When correctly docked, a row opens under the menu bar to accommodate the entire toolbar.

To add frequently used icons to the default display

1 Tap the Tools menu.

2 Tap Customize.
3 In the Commands tab, tap a category.
4 Drag an icon from the commands pane to the toolbar area.
5 Tap close to close the Customize dialog box.

30
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

File menu
The File menu contains the standard items that are found in this type of menu, in many software
applications.

Menu items Function

New Show Open an empty show file. All current data, including patch, are erased.
Open Show The Open File dialog box is displayed. Browse and open files as in all
windows programs.

To open a Sabre or 4D show file

Select the appropriate file type in the Files of Type combo box.
See “File conversion” page 169
Save Save the open file. If the show has been saved previously, it is saved
under the same name. If the show is a new show, the Save dialog box
opens.
Save As Open the Save As dialog box. Use to save a show file under a new name.
It is recommended to use this option when saving show files to organize
show versions.
Print Open the Print dialog box.
Print Preview Not implemented.
Print Setup Open the Print Setup dialog box.
Last used files A list of the recently used show files.
Exit (main screen) Close the application.

31
Compulite
Chapter 3

View menu and toolbar

The View Setting toolbar allows you to customize the column width, header displays, and behavior
of each display pane grid. The settings applied using this menu are saved with the display layout.
See “save a display layout” page 26.

Column widths

Adapt the column with according to:

Title
Value
Value and title
Screen

To change the column width

Tap View to open the view menu and choose one of the column width options.

Jump to display

Use the Jump items to automatically show the selected fixture or parameter as they are selected:
Fixture
Parameter

To activate the jump feature

Tap View to open the view menu and choose Fixture or Parameter.

Interactive selection feature

Interactive Fixture Selection allows you to select fixtures by tapping or clicking on their number in
the live display.

32
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

To activate the selection feature

Tap View to open the view menu and choose Interactive Fixture Selection.

Status indications

The Indications bar shows system status information. You can choose to show or hide the Indica-
tions bar. The Indications bar can be docked at any convenient location on the display.

Figure 15: Indications Bar

To display the Indications bar

1 Open the View menu.

2 Tap Indications Bar.
The Indications bar is now displayed.
3 Drag it to dock at any convenient place.
This is saved with your display layout.

Tools menu
The Tools menu is the gateway to many dialog boxes and customization:

33
Compulite
Chapter 3

Format menu and toolbar

The Format menu items control how parameter values are displayed in the spot and channel live
displays and what information is displayed.

There are two basic types of information that you can display in the parameter cell:

Parameter values can be displayed in decimal, percent, or hexadecimal format. Or you can choose
to display the parameter’s text. Example: the value for gobo wheel 1 may be Stars.

There are also format options to view:

Time, if parameter’s fade time has been customized.
The name of the playback device that is responsible of the output.
Library flags.
Profile flags.
Effect flags.

The format toolbar contains the icons that are available in the menu.

Examples of the live spot display using different display options:

Values in percent format. Note the library icons for pan/tilt and the color parameters. Note the time
icon for Cyan:

34
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

The display format is library:

The display format is time:

To maximize display space show spot information in one row only.

Live spot display with indications Live spot display displayed in one row.
displayed in a separate row.

To change the parameter values display

1 Tap Format.
2 Tap one of the format options.

To show spot information in one row

Tap View and disable .

LiveMode menu and toolbar

The items in this menu control which fixtures are shown in the spot and channel live displays

35
Compulite
Chapter 3

Window menu and display toolbar

The items in this menu are used to setup the display panes, save and load layouts, and lock displays.

36
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

Attachment menu
Media and text files can be attached to show objects. See “File attachments” page 243.

Menu items Function

Note mode Add a note to the attachment.

Add Attachment Add an attachment to the selected object - cues, macros, snaps, groups,
libraries, etc.
Delete Attachment Delete the attachment from the selected object.
Select Video Source Configure Vector to communicate with a camera connected at Vector’s
USB port or, via an IP address, a camera on the general network.

Editor Toolbar
The Editor toolbar contains buttons used when programming a show. The Editor toolbar is context
sensitive; the buttons change according to the current editing function.

13 buttons per row are displayed on the toolbar. There are two arrow keys at the end of a toolbar
row for paging the buttons, if necessary.

Figure 16: Editor Toolbar default (idle) mode

The Editor toolbar modes include:
:

Cue mode Dimmer (patch) mode

Every (selection) mode Library mode
Loop mode Parameter mode
Profile mode Fixture mode
Store mode Time mode

For more information See “Editor toolbar modes and buttons” page 285

To show the Editor toolbar

1 Open the workspace.

2 Expand the Editor Tools node.
3 Tap Editor ToolBar.
4 Optional: adjust the number of rows displayed by dragging the toolbars’ upper edge up or
down.

37
Compulite
Chapter 3

Wheel Assignments
The Wheel Assignments display shows the parameters, for the selected fixtures, in their wheel
banks assignments. It is most convenient to open the Wheel Assignments on the main screen, so it is
positioned above the physical wheels.

Figure 17: The Wheel Assignments display

To open the Wheel Assignments display

1 Open the workspace and expand the Tools node.

2 Tap Wheel Assignments.
3 Optional: adjust the number of rows displayed by its’ upper edge dragging up or down.

Setting up Soft Keys

Soft keys are used to access programming and playback components, such as libraries or snaps.
Each display pane can contain many soft key tabs. Each tab has multiple pages.

Soft keys also provide rapid store sequences. See “Using soft keys to store cues” page 93

Figure 18: Soft keys

To open a new tab

Go to the Window menu and tap . A new tab is added to the active pane.

Defining soft keys

Tabs can be defined as soft keys for libraries, QLists, groups, snaps, macros, or any item that
appears in the workspace.

To define a tab

Example: Define a tab for groups.

1 Tap the tab to make sure it is the active tab.
2 Open the Workspace.

38
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

3 Tap the Group node. If the spreadsheet view is active, tap to display soft keys.
4 Go to the next tab and repeat step 3 until all of the soft keys are set.

Paging soft keys

The number of soft keys displayed depends on the size of the pane.

To page soft keys

Press SCROLL/WIN and page using NEXT and PREVIOUS.

OR
Press SCROLL/WIN and scroll using the dimmer (vertical) wheel.

OR
Use PageUp and PageDown on the keyboard.

OR
If the pane’s title bar is displayed, page using the arrow controls in the title bar. Using the pane
header arrows, the soft key display jumps according to the size of the pane.

To jump to a specific soft key

Example: Jump to soft key 120.

1 With the pane’s title bar open, click in the soft key number field.
2 Enter 120 using the external keyboard.

Or
Press SCROLL WIN and use Vector’s keypad to select 120.
3 Press ENTER.
The display jumps to the selected soft key.

ATTENTION! When using the external keyboard to enter the soft key number, the pane’s
title bar must be open to show the soft key number field.

Soft key display

The soft key display can show the soft keys or spreadsheet style information for active tab.

Figure 19: Soft key display

Figure 20: Spreadsheet display

39
Compulite
Chapter 3

To toggle the soft key display

Tap , on the menu bar or under the Window menu to toggle the two views.

Note: To view more details, double click on an item in the spreadsheet.

Context sensitive soft keys

Use the context sensitive tool to set up a tab that responds to the current selection. See “Editor Tools
node” page 30

Playback displays
See “Playback displays” page 144

Grid properties
Grid properties include:
Text that appears in the grid headers
Which information is displayed,
The order in which the headers appear.
Font and font color
Background color
Row and column weight
Row and column line color

Grid properties can be changed in the Grid Properties dialog box. The options available in the
dialog box correspond to the active display pane.

Example: The active pane is live spots. The Show fields tab contains items relevant to the spot
display.

40
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

Figure 21: The Grid Properties dialog box

Tab What you can do

Show Fields The Available Fields appear in the left list box. The Show Fields list box, the right
list box, contains the fields that are displayed and the order in which they are
displayed.
Columns Edit the text that appears in the column headers.
Grid Customize fonts, font color, background color, grid line weights and line color for
specific display panes.

To open the Grid Properties dialog box

1 Position the pointer on one of the grid headers and right click.
2 Tap Properties.
3 The Grid Properties dialog box opens.

OR
View

To add fields to headers

In the Show Fields tab, select an item in the Available fields list box and tap ADD.

To remove fields from headers

In the Show Fields tab, select the field from in the Show Fields list box and tap REMOVE.

To change the order of the fields

Select an item in the Show Fields list box and tap MOVE UP or MOVE DOWN until the item is
in the desired position.

41
Compulite
Chapter 3

Customizing column headers

The fields in the Columns tab are used to edit the text that appears in the grid headers. The number
of characters in the header affects the width of the header and the amount of information displayed
in one display pane, without having to scroll.

Figure 22: Columns tab in the Grid Properties dialog box

Sections Controls What it does

General Field (radio button) Select a parameter name from the drop down list.

All (radio button) When All is selected, the Width field is enabled.
Title Type the parameter name as you want it to appear in the
header.
Width For spots only. Preset an absolute width for spreadsheet
columns.
Column Lock column to Locking columns together fixes the columns in place and
Locking excludes them from horizontal scrolling. Example: Fixture
name and number are usually locked, so are always
displayed.
Channel No. of Columns Set the number of columns per row for the live channel
Display display. This determines how many channels are displayed.

Customizing grid appearance for specific display panes

In the Grid tab, you can customize the look for display panes.

To customize grid properties

Example: Customize the grid look for the master playback pane.
1 Point at one of the headings in the master playback pane and right click.
2 Choose Grid from the fly out menu.

42
 VECTOR
Displays and Menus

The Grid Properties dialog box opens.

3 Go to the Grid tab.
4 Tap Customize to enable the fields.
5 Set the fields.
6 Tap OK to save and exit.
These settings will be saved with your layout.

To return to default grid properties

1 Point at one of the headings in the master playback pane and right click.
2 Choose Grid from the fly out menu.
The Grid Properties dialog box opens.
3 Go to the Grid tab.
4 Tap Customize to disable.
All fields return to their factory default settings.
Tap OK to save and exit.

43
Compulite
Chapter 3

44
Chapter 4 Importing Devices and Patching
Fixtures
At start up, Vector's patch configuration is empty. The system must be configured for the types of
devices and the number of fixtures that will be used in the show. Opening a new show file also
resets the patch to empty.

This chapter contains the following sections:

Patch manager toolbar (see page 46)
The patch manager workspace (see page 46)
Importing devices (see page 47)
Creating fixtures and patching DMX addresses (see page 48)
Creating and patching fixtures with scrollers (see page 50)
Applying the patch and exiting the patch manager (see page 51)
Deleting fixtures and clearing patch assignments (see page 51)
Modifying fixture properties (see page 52)
Changing a device setup (see page 53)
Changing DMX channel properties (see page 53)
Patching to DMX addresses in the editor (see page 54)
Test channels, dimmers, and DMX offsets (see page 56)
Using park (see page 58)

Patch Manager
Determining the type and number of fixtures used in the show and patching these fixtures is done in
the Patch Manager.

The Patch Manager’s features include all patch and configuration activities:
Determining the type of fixtures used in the show.
The number of fixtures.
Assigning fixture numbers used when programming.
The pan and tilt orientation for moving devices.
Patching fixtures to DMX addresses.

The patch schedule is arranged in spreadsheet style. Each set has its own spreadsheet.

45
Compulite
Chapter 4

To open the Patch Manager

1 Tap Tools menu Patch Manager.

Patch manager toolbar

Tapping an icon on the Patch Manager toolbar opens the dialog box or wizard for the selected
function.

The patch manager workspace

The nodes in the patch manager workspace change the information displayed in the main pane.

Figure 23: Patch manager workspace

Node Sub Node Function

Devices Available devices • Tap + to expand and view the imported devices.
• Tap a specific device to view the device's parameters
and a spreadsheet showing the device set up.
• Tap a parameter to view the set up for that parameter.
Sets Spot • Tap Channel, Spot, or Matrix to view the patch schedule
Channel for that set.
Matrix • Tap + to expand and view the fixtures in each set. Tap-
ping a fixture displays a spreadsheet showing the cues
where the fixture is used.
DMX Ports (universes) 1 - 16 • Tap + to expand and view a list of DMX ports.
• Tapping a specific port shows its patch schedule.
Matrix User defined matrixes • Define matrixes and select a matrix for mapping.
List

Topo • Display Topo map. See, Chapter 11, “Topo”

View

The Patch Manager workspace has three operation modes:

46
 VECTOR
Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures

Collapse, used to collapse the entire tree to display only the main nodes.
Selection mode, used when expanding nodes or to select more than one node.
Naviagation mode, used to change the active tab to the selected node.

To change workspace modes

Tap S (for selection mode) or N (for navigation mode).

To collapse the workspace tree

Tap C (collapse).

Working in the Patch Manager

The patch manager work flow is:
1. Import devices.
2. Create fixtures.
3. Patch fixtures.
4. Apply the patch.
5. Exit the patch manager.

Importing devices
You must import the devices that you intend to use in your show. Devices are imported from a list
of device files. The IMPORT DEVICE button in the dialog boxes opens the list of device files.

To import a device

1 Tap . A dialog box containing a list of device files opens.

2 Double click on the device file. The device is imported to Vector's patch manager. It
appears under the Device folder in the workspace.
3 Repeat this procedure to add more devices to the patch manager.

Note: To select more than one device, hold down Cntrl and click on more devices.
When your selection is complete, click OPEN.

47
Compulite
Chapter 4

Creating fixtures and patching DMX addresses

Patching fixtures is a two-step procedure: creating fixtures and patching fixtures. There are sepa-
rate dialog boxes for creating fixtures and patching fixtures. There is also a wizard for creating and
patching.

Figure 24: Create and patch fixtures wizard

Create fixture
Field Information
fields

Device The drop down list shows the devices imported to the patch manager.
Create number of Choose the number of fixtures for the selected device.
fixtures

Start number Assign the first fixture number for the selected device. Vector automatically
assigns sequential numbers according to the number of fixtures as defined in
the Create number of fixtures field.
Name Type a name for the device. The name is displayed in the live editor display if
Fixture Name is included in the live display grid properties.

Set Sets organize the fixtures into generic groups: spot, channel, or matrix.
Note: If you are using matrixes, create the fixtures used in the matrix under
the matrix set. See “Setting up matrixes” page 224

Orientation Change the pan/tilt orientation for the fixtures created here.

48
 VECTOR
Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures

The fields in the Patch dialog box are:

:

Patch fixture
Field Information
fields

Main This is the default.

Port Enter the DMX universe (port) number for the fixture(s). The default is the
first universe containing available DMX channels.
Address Vector automatically displays the next available address.
Vector automatically calculates the DMX length starting from the address in
this field. Example: If the address is 5, patching fixtures that use 10 DMX
channels assigns DMX addresses 5 through 14 to the first fixture, 15 through
24 to the second fixture, etc.
Interval When in the channel set, the default is 1.
When in the spot set, the default interval is the DMX length of the device.
External Check this to patch an external dimmer.

IMPORTANT!
For scrollers: The dimmer is Main. The scroller is External.
For yokes: The yoke is Main. The dimmer is External.

To create and patch fixtures

Example: Create 12 fixtures for VL2402 devices. The fixtures start number is 24. Patch the 12
fixtures to DMX universe 3, starting at DMX channel 1.
1 Tap Spot under the Sets node.
2 Tap . The Create and Patch dialog box opens.
3 Select VL2402 from the device drop down list.
4 Enter 12 fixtures in the Create Number of Fixtures field.
5 Enter 24 in the Start Number field.
6 Type a name for the device in the Name field. This name will appear in the live display.
7 Tap NEXT.
8 Enter 3, the DMX universe number, in the Connector field
9 Enter 1, the DMX start address, in the DMX address field.
10 Optional - change the patch interval in the Patch interval field. The default interval is the
length of the device.
11 Tap FINISH. The dialog closes. The fixtures appears and their patch information appear in
the spot set spreadsheet.

To leave intervals between DMX addresses

Example: Allow 5 DMX addresses between each fixture.

Stand on the Patch interval field and enter the number 5.

49
Compulite
Chapter 4

To patch more than 1 DMX address to a channel

See, page 54

To patch more than 1 DMX address to a channel

Example: Patch Port 2, DMX addresses 12 - 24 to channel 1. If DMX 12 - 24 are patched to

other channels, you first must clear these assignments.
1 Press DIM or PATCH.
2 Select the DMX addresses: 2/12 2/24.
3 Press CHANNEL and enter 1 on the numeric keypad.
4 Press ENTER.

Creating and patching fixtures with scrollers

Fixtures with scrollers can belong to either the channel set or the spot set.

Scrollers that are part of the channel set appear in the channel display. The frame value is displayed
in the color row. Scrollers that are part of the spot set appear in the spot display. The frame value is
displayed in a color parameter row. In both cases, it is necessary to select only the spot or channel
number to access the dimmer and the scroller.

Figure 25: Scrollers as channels and spots

IMPORTANT! Patch scrollers to the external dimmer.

Patching fixtures for use in editor fixture mode

Patching fixture sets so there are no overlapping fixture numbers allows you to select fixtures
without specifying the fixture type.

An example of fixtures patched with no overlap is:

Fixture set Fixture numbers

CHANNEL 1 to 100

SPOT 201 to 300

MATRIX 401 to 512

50
 VECTOR
Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures

Applying the patch and exiting the patch manager

Apply the patch when you want to save the patch, update the show, and continue working in the
patch manager. Neglecting to apply the changes in the patch while continuing to work in the patch
manager may cause anomalies. For instance, you have cleared the patch for a number of fixtures
and now attempt to patch using the DMX addresses you just cleared. If you have not applied the
patch after clearing, the system generates the message: Patch Exists. Applying the patch after the
clear operation prevents this.

To apply the patch

Tap .

To exit the Patch Manager

1 Tap . You are prompted to save the patch data.

2 Tap YES to save changes. Tap NO to exit without saving.

Note: If you chose YES, exiting the patch manager automatically applies the patch.

Modifying the patch

You may want to change information in the patch manager:
Change the number of fixtures
Clear addresses
Renumber or rename fixtures
Change the pan/tilt orientation
Change a device setup
Modify DMX channels

Deleting fixtures and clearing patch assignments

You may want to repatch fixtures.

IMPORTANT! Always clear patch assignments before reassigning DMX addresses.

To clear fixtures

1 Select the appropriate set.

2 Tap .
The Delete Fixture dialog box opens.
3 Enter the fixtures’ numbers in the From No. and To No. fields.
4 Tap OK to update and close the dialog box.

OR

51
Compulite
Chapter 4

Press APPLY to update the show and keep the dialog box open.

To clear patch assignments

1 Select the appropriate Set.

2 Tap . The Clear Patch dialog box opens.
3 Enter the fixtures’ desk numbers in the From No. and To No. fields.
4 Tap OK to update and close the dialog box.

OR
Tap APPLY to update the live functioning and keep the dialog box open.

Modifying fixture properties

Use the Modify Fixtures wizard to:
Renumber fixtures
Rename fixtures
Change the pan/tilt orientation.

Figure 26: Modify Fixtures wizard

Modify fixture fields Field Information

Set This field is disabled. Make sure this shows the appropriate set. If not,
exit the wizard and choose the correct set.
Fixture no. Select a range of fixtures for modification.
Device The drop down list contains the devices imported to the patch
manager.
Renumber starting from Type the new numbering.

52
 VECTOR
Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures

Modify fixture fields Field Information

Rename to Type a new name for the selected fixtures. The name is displayed in
the live spot or channel display if Fixture Name is included in the live
display grid properties.
Set This field is disabled. Make sure this shows the appropriate set. If not,
exit the wizard and choose the right set.
Orientation Change the pan/tilt orientation for the fixtures.

To modify fixture properties

1 Select the set.

2 Tap . The Modify Fixtures wizard opens.
3 Enter the range of fixtures in the Fixture no. field.
4 Tap NEXT.
5 Enter the relevant information in the appropriate fields.
6 Tap FINISH.

Changing a device setup

You can access the Device Builder, to change a device’s parameter set up and wheel assignments,
from within the Patch Manager.

To open the Device Builder

1 In the Patch Manager workspace, tap Devices.

2 Right click on the device being modified and choose Properties from the fly out menu. The
Device Builder opens.
3 Change the device setup and save the device.

ATTENTION! Devices modified in the Device Builder via the Patch manager are saved
only in the current show.

4 Optional: to make the device generally available, save it in the device library:
Tap SAVE IN LIBRARY Browse to your device library Tap OK

Changing DMX channel properties

Modifying DMX channels is done in the DMX Channel Properties dialog box.

The DMX Channel Properties dialog box is the place to:

Set dimmer curves
Set a proportional patch
Enable GM control

53
Compulite
Chapter 4

To change DMX channel properties

1 Display the DMX universe (port) spreadsheet.

2 Right click on the DMX channel you want to modify. If modifying more than one DMX
channel, right click on the first channel in the range.
3 If modifying one DMX channel, choose Properties from the fly out menu. If modifying
more than one channel, choose Modify Range.
4 Make sure the address number in the Address field is correct. If modifying a range of chan-
nels, enter the last channel number in the To field.
5 To change the proportional patch, use the Proportional patch spin box to set the value.
To change the curve, select a curve from the Curve combobox.
To disable grand master (GM) control over the selected DMX channel(s), uncheck the GM
check box.
6 Tap OK. The dialog box closes.
7 Tap to apply the changes.

Patch functions in the editor

Patch functions that can be done in the live editor, without opening the patch manager are:
Patching fixtures to DMX channels
Clearing patch
Parking dimmers
Testing dimmers and DMX channels

Patching to DMX addresses in the editor

Pressing DIM on the console or PATCH on the Editor toolbar puts the toolbar in patch mode.

Figure 27: Dim (patch) mode on the Editor toolbar

The Editor toolbar buttons in dim mode are:
CLEAR PATCH
EXTERNAL PARAMETER (patch address for an external dimmer)
PARK
PROPORTIONAL LEVEL
CLEAR PROPORTIONAL LEVEL

When patching in live mode it is useful to view the patch sheet. Open the patch sheet through the
Workspace. See “The patch manager workspace” page 46.

54
 VECTOR
Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures

Fixtures that have no patch assignments are flagged in the live display.

Figure 28: The no patch flag

To patch channels or spots

Example: Patch channel fixture 5 to DMX address port 2 dimmer 24.
1 Press DIM or PATCH.
2 Enter the dimmer number on the numeric keypad.
3 Press CHANNEL and 5.
4 Press ENTER.

OR
1 Select channel 5.
2 Press DIM.
3 Press 2 (the port) / (slash) 24 (dimmer) or use the direct dimmer number, in this example,
536.
4 Press ENTER. The command line shows Assigned when the operation is successful.

To patch more than 1 DMX address to a channel

Example: Patch Port 2, DMX addresses 12 - 24 to channel 1. If DMX 12 - 24 are patched to

other channels, you first must clear these assignments.
1 Press DIM or PATCH.
2 Select the DMX addresses: 2/12 2/24.
3 Press CHANNEL and enter 1 on the numeric keypad.
4 Press ENTER.

To clear patching

Example 1: Clear the patch assignment for channel 5 which is patched to port 1 DMX offset 5.
1 Press DELETE.
2 Select channel 5.
3 Press DIM.
4 Press ENTER. The Delete dialog box opens.
5 Press ENTER again or tap DELETE in the dialog box.

OR
1 Press DELETE.
2 Press DIM

55
Compulite
Chapter 4

3 Select the dimmer by pressing 1/5.

4 Press ENTER. The Delete dialog box opens.
5 Press ENTER again or tap DELETE in the dialog box.

OR
1 Tap PATCH.
2 Select the dimmer by pressing 1/5.
3 Press CLEAR PATCH. The Delete dialog box opens.
4 Press ENTER or tap DELETE in the dialog box.

To patch external dimmers

Example: Channel 8, patched to DMX channel 8, is a fixture with a scroller. Patch the external
dimmer number,for the scroller , to DMX channel 108.
1 Press DIM and select the dimmer number, 108.
2 Tap EXTERNAL PARAMETER .
3 Select fixture channel 8.
4 Press ENTER.

To set proportional dimmer level

1 Enter the DMX address on the numeric keypad.

2 Press DIM or tap PATCH.
3 Tap PROPORTIONAL LEVEL.
4 Press @ and enter the proportional level on the numeric keypad or use the wheel labelled
Proportional Level.
5 Press ENTER.

To clear proportional patch

1 Press DIM and chose the dimmer number using the numeric keypad.
2 Tap CLEAR PROPORTIONAL LEVEL.
3 Press ENTER.

Test channels, dimmers, and DMX offsets

Test channels, dimmers, and DMX offsets when in editor mode.

To test dimmers

DIMMER #, @ ## (or ZERO or FULL or ON), ENTER, NEXT (or PREVIOUS)

Note: Absolute dimmer numbers are displayed in the command line. Example: DMX
universe 2 dimmer 4 is displayed as dimmer 516.

56
 VECTOR
Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures

To test DMX offset

1 Select the dimmer number using #/# format, where the first number is the DMX universe
and the second number is the offset. Example: 2/4 is DMX port 2, dimmer 4.
2 Set a level using @ or ZERO or FULL or ON or the Dimmer Test wheel..
3 Press ENTER.
4 Press NEXT or PREVIOUS. The current selection fades to zero and the next (or previous
DMX offset) fades to the set level.

Note: When reaching the last offset for the DMX port, Vector automatically test the first
offset in the next port.

To test channels or spots

CHANNEL (SPOT) #, @ ## (or ZERO or FULL or ON), ENTER, NEXT (or PREVIOUS)

To exit test mode

Press CLEAR, RELEASE, or RESET or move the intensity wheel. The last channel, spot,
dimmer, or offset tested, returns to its previous level.

Examining the patch

You can examine the patch for all channels and spots or individual channels and spots.

To examine the channel patch

1 Press CHANNEL.
2 Press EXAM. A list of the channels and their patch information is displayed.

OR
1 Press CHANNEL and select the channel number.
2 Press EXAM. The patch information for the selected channel is displayed.

To examine the spot patch

1 Press SPOT.
2 Press EXAM. A list of the channels and their patch information is displayed.

OR
1 Press SPOT and select the channel number.
2 Press EXAM. The patch information for the selected channel is displayed.

To examine the patch by sets

1 Press SET and select the channel number.

2 Press EXAM. The patch information for the selected set is displayed.

57
Compulite
Chapter 4

Using park
Dimmers, spots, spot parameters, channels and cues can be parked at a specified level. Parked items
remain at the specified level and do not respond to level changes in the editor or to the general
master.

Park levels must be set using FL, ZERO, or @ and a numerical entry.

Note: Pressing B.O. blacks out parked items.

There are two ways to view parked dimmers:

In the editor - the parked dimmers are designated by an icon alongside the dimmer number.
Through the Workspace - the parked dimmers and their parked values are displayed.

Figure 29: Parked dimmers exam via the editor

Figure 30: Parked dimmer exam via the Workspace, DMX node

To park dimmers or DMX offsets

1 Press PARK.
2 Press DIM.
3 Enter the dimmer number (or DMX offset) on the numeric keypad.
4 Press @ and enter a level.
5 Press ENTER.

To release all parked dimmers or DMX offsets

RELEASE, PARK, DIM, ENTER

To release selected parked dimmers

RELEASE, PARK, DIM, #, ENTER

To park a channel

PARK, CHANNEL #, @ ##, ENTER

To release all parked channels

RELEASE, PARK, CHANNEL), ENTER

To release specific parked channels

RELEASE, PARK, CHANNEL # ( #), ENTER

58
 VECTOR
Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures

To park a spot’s dimmer parameter

1 Press PARK.
2 Select spots.
3 Press FULL or ON..
4 Press ENTER.
5

To park a parameter

1 Press PARK.
2 Select the spot.
3 Select a parameter and set its level.
4 Press ENTER.
5

To park a spot’s dimmer parameter

1 Select spots.
2 Press PARK.
3 Press @.
4 Press FULL or ON..
5 Press ENTER.

To release all parked spots

RELEASE, PARK, SPOT, ENTER

To release specific parked spots

RELEASE, PARK, SPOT # ( #), ENTER

To release specific parked parameters

RELEASE, PARK, SPOT # ( #), parameter type and parameter, ENTER

To view parked dimmers

Press EXAM.
Press DIM.
The Editor toolbar is now in dim mode.
1 Tap PARK.
2 Press ENTER.
The parked dimmers are flagged with an icon.

59
Compulite
Chapter 4

Examining patch information

You can examine:
Patch information for specific fixtures
Each DMX universe
Parked dimmers

To exam patch information for a specific fixture

1 Open the Workspace tree.

2 Expand the Patch node.
3 Expand the Sets node.
4 Expand the appropriate set.
5 Choose the fixture.
The fixture’s patch information is displayed in the active pane or the default exam tab.

OR
1 Press EXAM
2 Press CHANNEL or SPOT.
3 Enter the fixture number on the numeric keypad.
4 Press DIM.
5 Press ENTER.

To examine the patch for a DMX universe

1 Open the Workspace tree.

2 Expand the Patch node.
3 Expand the DMX node.
4 Choose the DMX universe.
The patch information is displayed in the active pane or the default exam tab.

To view parked dimmers

1 Open the Workspace tree.

2 Expand the Patch node.
3 Tap DMX.
4 The DMX address exam opens.
5 Tap the Park tab to view parked dimmers.
Parked dimmer levels are displayed here.

OR
1 Press EXAM.

60
 VECTOR
Importing Devices and Patching Fixtures

2 Press DIM.
3 Tap PARK.
4 Press ENTER.
The parked dimmer exam looks like this:

61
Compulite
Chapter 4

62
Chapter 5 Selecting and Controlling Fixtures
This chapter includes the following sections:
Selecting fixtures (see page 63)
Working with groups (see page 67)
Resetting the editor (see page 72)
Spot ignition (see page 72)
Setting parameter values (see page 75)
Resetting parameter values (see page 80)

Selecting fixtures
Fixtures must be first selected, so they are then available for editing. Fixtures that have been
assigned values in the editor can then be stored as cues.

Selection options are available through the touch screen buttons, on the Editor toolbar, and on dedi-
cated console keys. When the Interactive Fixture Selection option (under the View menu) is enabled,
fixtures can be selected by tapping directly on the live channel or spot display.
:

Console keys used for fixture selection

Key What it does

SPOT Set the keypad for spot selection.

CHANNEL Set the keypad for channel selection.
SET Select fixtures using the set organizer.
Example: SET 1/ 1 12, selects spots 1 through 12.
Example: SET 2/ 100 200, selects fixtures in a matrix.

FIXTURE When channel and spot numbers are not overlapping, set the numeric default
to FIXTURE.
Example: Channels are numbered 1 100. Spots are numbered 101 164.
Select 98 and channel 98 is selected; select 124 and spot 124 is selected.
0-9 Use for numeric entries.

‘Thru’ for range selections.

63
Compulite
Chapter 5

Console keys used for fixture selection

Key What it does

— Use to remove a channel/spot form a range selection.

Example: CHANNEL 1 5 — 4, selects channels 1, 2, 3, 5.

+ Functions as an “and” key when used between channel selections.

Example: CHANNEL 1 + 3 + 7 + 11, selects channels 1, 3, 7, and 11.

or wheel Makes the last selection available. Example: Before pressing RESET, the
selection was spots 1, 3, 6, and 8. Press SPOT or move a parameter wheel
to quickly reselect this selection.

To select a single fixture

SPOT, 1. Spot 1 is displayed in the command line. All spot 1 parameters can now be assigned
parameter values using the parameter wheels or console keys.
CHANNEL, 1. Channel 1 is displayed in the command line. The channel’s dimmer and, if
present, scroller can now be assigned values using the wheels or console keys.

To select a sequential range of fixtures

SPOT, 1, , 24. Selects all the spots in the range.

To select a non-sequential range of fixtures

SPOT, 1, +, 6, +, 9. Selects spots 1, 6, and 9.

To cancel a selection

1 Press RESET or CLEAR.

Note: To completely reset Vector, press SHIFT + RESET. Until this is done the last
selection is always available on the wheels.

Quick selection options

In selection mode, the Editor toolbar offers quick selection options for frequently used selection
types.

Figure 31: Selection mode on the Editor toolbar

Console key
Button What it does
equivalents

LAST SELECTION Re-selects the last selection. or wheel

64
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

Console key
Button What it does
equivalents

ALL EDITOR Selects the entire editor output. ACTIVE

EVERY Opens additional selection filters. none

USED IN SHOW Selects all the patched fixtures that have been used none
in cues.

Filtering selections

The Editor toolbar provides selection filters. Pressing EVERY opens the selection filter options.

Figure 32: Selection filters

Console key
BUTTON What it does
equivalents

EVERY Opens filter options none

ODDS Selects every other fixture, within the designated 1
range, starting with the first fixture.
Example1: The range 1 thru 8 is selected. Tapping
ODDS selects 1, 3, 5, and 7.
Example 2: The range 2 thru 8 is selected. Tapping
ODDS selects 2, 4, 6, and 8.

EVENS Selects every other fixture, within the designated 2

range, starting with the second fixture.
Example1: The range 1thru 8 is selected. Using
EVENS selects 2, 4, and 6.
Example 2: The range 2 thru 8 is selected. Using
EVENS selects 3, 5, and 7.

3RD Selects every third fixture, within the designated 3

range, starting with the first fixture.
4TH Selects every fourth fixture within the designated 4
range, starting with the first fixture.

Note: Even though the Toolbar buttons

are only up to 4th (every fourth fixture),
you can enter any number on the keypad.
/ Advance selection by a specified increment. /
Example: 4 / 2, selects the second fixture in each
group of four fixtures.
Therefore: CHANNEL 1 20 EVERY 4 / 2, selects
channels 2, 6, 10, 14, and 18.

65
Compulite
Chapter 5

Console key
BUTTON What it does
equivalents

intersect Not implemented yet

invert all Not implemented yet

invert range Not implemented yet

To use the quick selection buttons

1 Press SPOT or CHANNEL. Skip this step if the command default is the fixture type you
want.
2 Select a range of fixtures.
3 Tap one of the quick selection buttons. The selected fixtures are displayed in yellow in the
live display (and are shown in the command line) and are available for editing.

To grab the last selection

The last fixture selection can be quickly accessed.

Tap LAST SELECTION on the Editor toolbar. The last selection is highlighted in the live
display and is displayed in the command line.

OR
Move any wheel. The wheel grabs the last selection.

OR
Press . The last selection is highlighted in the live display and is displayed in the command
line.

Interactive fixture selection

You can select fixtures directly from the live channel, spot, and matrix displays. The default setting
for this feature is disabled.

To enable interactive fixture selection

Go to the View menu and tap (Interactive fixture selection).

To use the interactive fixture selection feature

In the live display, tap the fixture numbers to select them.

Selecting fixtures via the topo map

The topo map can be used to select fixtures.

To select fixtures via the topo map

Tap single fixtures or drag your pointing device to mark multiple fixtures.

66
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

Note: Make sure the topo view is not in edit mode. If topo is in edit mode dragging
fixtures moves them to a new location on the topo map

Command line numerical default

A command line default can be set so Vector recognizes the first number entered as a belonging to
the default object. The default selection makes it unnecessary to select the object type. The
command line numerical default can be set for:
:

• Spot • Channel • Fixture • Cue

• QList • Group • Dimmer

To set the command line selection default

Example: Set the command line default for spot or channel.

1 Press SPOT twice. Spot appears in the command line. Vector now recognizes the first
number selection as spot selection, making it unnecessary to press this key before the
number selection.

Or
2 Press CHANNEL twice. Channel appears in the command line. Vector recognizes the first
number selection as a channel without needing to press this key.

Note: In the selection sequences examples, the instruction to press the keys SPOT or
CHANNEL is included for clarity. If the command line default is appropriate to the type of
fixture selection there is no need to press these keys.

Working with groups

Groups are collections of frequently used spot and channel selections. They are used for quick
editing selections. Groups can be combined and manipulated like all other selection sequences.

Automatically generating groups

Through the Generate Groups and Libs dialog box, Vector can automatically generate fixture
groups. You can, of course, define groups to suit your show and work methods.

The automatic fixture group options for spots per device, channels, and scrollers are:
All
Even
Odd
Every third - counting from the first fixture of a device type.
Every fourth - counting from the first fixture of a device type.

Through the Generate Libraries and Groups dialog box, Vector automatically generates:
Color libraries

67
Compulite
Chapter 5

Intensity libraries
Image libraries
Groups

You can choose to generate some or all of these objects for some or all of the devices used in the
show.

Figure 33: Generate libraries and groups dialog box

You can number the libraries and groups to your convenience in the dialog box’s numbering area.
The numbering option fields are:

Start From Store the first generated library or group to the number in this field and sequen-
tially increment the libraries or groups.

Align Choose an offset to leave space for groups that will be stored later on. Generally,
it is convenient to chose an offset that corresponds to your display set up.
Example: Assume that you have sized the soft keys pane to show 5 soft keys per
row. You choose to generate 5 groups for each fixture type. If the start number is
1 and the offset is 10, the generated groups will appear in every other row.

If there are existing libraries and groups you can choose to:
Leave them as is
Overwrite them
Update them

To automatically generate groups

1 Open the Tools menu and tap Generate Groups and Libs.
The dialog box opens.
2 Expand Generate All.
3 Make sure Groups is checked.
4 Expand Generate for Devices and make sure the devices you want organized into groups
are checked.
5 Set the start number in the Start from fields and the offset in the Align field.

68
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

6 Select the type of group (Even, Odd, All, 3rd, 4th).

7 Select the behavior (Leave, Overwrite. or Update).
8 Tap APPLY.

Storing groups manually

Groups can contain any number of fixtures and fixture types.

To store groups

1 Select fixtures using any selection sequence.

2 Press STORE
3 Tap a number on the group soft keys.

OR
1 Select fixtures using any selection sequence.
2 Press STORE.
3 Press GROUP and enter a number on the numeric keypad.
4 Press ENTER.

Tip! The selection order is saved with the group. Selection order controls how fan and
effects are applied to the selection.

Adding text tags to groups

To name a groups

1 Press TEXT.
2 Select the group.
3 Press ENTER.
The Text dialog box opens.
4 Use the keyboard to type the library name.
5 Press ENTER (on the console or the keyboard) or tap OK.
The dialog box closes.

OR
Immediately after storing the group, press TEXT and follow steps 4 and 5.

Deleting groups
To delete groups

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the group or select more than one group: GROUP # #.

69
Compulite
Chapter 5

3 Press ENTER.
The Delete dialog box opens.
4 Press DELETE or ENTER again or tap DELETE in the dialog box.

OR
1 Press DELETE.
2 Tap the group soft key.
3 Press ENTER.

Examining groups
To view a list of groups

Press EXAM, GROUP, and then press ENTER.

OR
Toggle the group soft keys to spreadsheet view by tapping . A list of groups is displayed
in the active pane.

To examine a group

Example: Examine group 5.

Press EXAM, select the group, and press ENTER. The contents of the library are displayed in
the active pane.

OR
1 View the groups in spreadsheet format. If the group tab is in soft key format, toggle to
spreadsheet view.
2 Double click on group 5.
The contents of the group are displayed in the active pane.

Copying groups
To copy groups

1 Select the source group.

2 Press COPY.
The group is copied to the clipboard.
3 Select the target group.
4 Press PASTE.
The new group is named Copy of Group # (source group).

Modifying groups
When modifying groups you can choose to:
Overwrite the existing group with the selection.

70
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

Update by adding the selection to the group.

Release the selected fixtures from the group

To add fixtures

1 Select fixtures.
2 Press STORE.
3 Select the target group’s number on the keypad and press ENTER.

Or
Tap the group’s number on the group softkey pane.
4 Tap UPDATE.
The dialog box closes and the group is updated with the new information.

To release fixtures from groups

1 Press RELEASE.
2 Select the fixtures.
3 Tap the group’s soft key.
The group is updated.

Output location color code

The default color scheme for the console’s output shows the output source:
Yellow - Fixture numbers for fixtures that are active in the editor.
Red - Values currently under wheel control.
White - Values in the editor, but not currently under wheel control.
Blue - Output from AB.
Yellow - Output from the faders or QKeys.
Purple - Tracking on the master playback. (tracking mode only).
Red - Redundant tracking. (tracking mode only).

Values displayed in white and red are, by default, the values included when storing a cue. This does
not include redundant tracking values.

71
Compulite
Chapter 5

Resetting the editor

Resetting the editor clears all selections and values in the editor. However, the last selection
remains active on the wheels. Example: Set a dimmer value for channel 1. Pressing RESET clears
channel 1 from the editor. Move the dimmer wheel and channel 1 is active. Your last selection is
available until it is totally released.

To reset the editor

Press RESET. All values held in the editor are released in a 2 second fade.

Or
Press RESET RESET quickly. All values held in the editor bump out.

To release the last selection

Press SHIFT + RESET.

Default stage values

Pressing RESET, sends the parameter values to their default stage values.

Default stage values can be set as a device’s home values or as the last editor value. Set this option
in the Settings dialog box. See “System settings” page 233

Spot ignition
The Spot Control dialog box controls lamp on, lamp off, and lamp reset.

To turn the lamp on

1 Select the spots.

2 On the Editor toolbar, tap CONTROL.
The Spot Control dialog box opens.
3 Tap LAMP ON and CLOSE.

IMPORTANT! Spot ignition is a stand alone function. To continue working, spots must
be selected again.

To turn the lamp off

1 Select the spots.

2 On the Editor toolbar, tap CONTROL.
The Spot Control dialog box opens.
3 Tap LAMP OFF and CLOSE.

72
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

To reset the fixture

1 Select the spots.

2 On the Editor toolbar, tap CONTROL.
The Spot Control dialog box opens.
3 Tap RESET and CLOSE.

Controlling parameter values

Parameter values can be set for channels, extras, scroller channels, and spots. The wheels and
keypad access all parameters. The trackball is reserved for pan and tilt.

Parameter values are displayed in the live (channel and spot) displays. The parameter’s display
format options are found under the Format menu. See “Format menu and toolbar” page 34.

Parameter wheels
The five flat wheels control all parameters. The Wheel Assignments are organized in banks. Param-
eters can be assigned to up to eight times in any wheel bank or layer. Wheel assignments are made
in the Device Builder.

Each parameter wheel has 2 associated keys. The left key switches bank layers. The right key
selects the parameter.

Figure 34: Parameter wheels, parameter keys, and wheel control keys
The vertical wheel controls the dimmer for both spot and channel fixtures. Intensity parameters are
also assigned to wheels in the intensity wheel bank. Pan and tilt are controlled by the trackball. Pan
and tilt are also assigned to wheels in the position wheel bank. Wheels work in normal or fine
resolution.

See “open the Wheel Assignments display” page 38

73
Compulite
Chapter 5

Wheel banks
Possible parameters
(Parameter types)

INTENSITY Dimmer, strobe

POSITION Pan, tilt, movement speed
COLOR Cyan, yellow, magenta, color wheels, color speed.
BEAM Focus, zoom, iris
IMAGE Gobo wheels, prism, gobo spin.
SHAPE Framing shutters, frost

To switch wheel banks

Press a wheel bank (parameter type) key.

The Wheel Assignments display shows the wheel bank for the selected parameter type. The
wheels can now be used to set values for the selected parameters.

To switch bank layers and select a parameter

Use this procedure to select a parameter when there is more than one layer in the wheel bank.
1 Press the left key of the pair associated with a wheel to move to another layer.
2 Press the right key of the pair associated with a wheel to select the highlighted parameter.

OR
Tap the parameter on the wheel assignments display.

To use the wheels at fine resolution

Press and hold SHIFT while turning the parameter wheel.

Parameter modes
There are two modes of parameters:
Continuous parameters wheel up from 0 (zr) to 100% (FL) with no internal divisions.
Step parameters are parameters defined with internal divisions. There can be continuous
control between steps or a step can transmit a preset value. Steps are commonly used for chan-
nels controlling both dimmer intensity and strobe and with gobo wheels and color wheels.
The display format for step parameters depends on the step’s definition in the device builder
application. Some examples of indexed step displays are: [Link] (step at its maximum value) or
text, such as, Fast Strobe.
Indexed step parameters can be defined with a stopper between steps or without a stopper
between steps. For steps with stoppers, a specific command must be given to move between
steps.
For more information on step parameters. See “Editing parameters” page 271

74
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

To move from step to step

Use the parameter wheel to set the step values. When there are no stoppers between steps,
moving the wheel moves from the highest value of one step to the lowest value of the next
step.

OR
Tap STEP UP or STEP DOWN, located on the Editor toolbar, to jump from step to step. When
there are stoppers between steps, the only way to move to the next or previous step is by using
these buttons.

Setting parameter values

The wheels and trackball are used to set values for moving light parameters, channel dimmers, and
scrollers. Absolute values can be set using the numeric keypad.

To set dimmer intensity

Select the fixtures and use the vertical wheel

OR
Switch to the Intens(ity) wheel bank and use the horizontal dimmer wheel.

To set position

Select the fixtures and use the trackball to set pan and tilt

OR
Switch to the position wheel bank and use the horizontal wheels for pan and tilt.

Note: The arrow keys to the right of the trackball lock pan or tilt.

To set parameter values

Example: Set values for dimmer intensity, the color wheel, and the rotating gobo.
1 Select the fixtures.
2 Set the dimmer intensity using the vertical dimmer wheel or the flat encoder the controls
the dimmer in the Intensity wheel bank

Or
Press @ and set a value using the numeric keypad. Then press ENTER.
The spot's lamp is on at the selected intensity. The dimmer intensity is displayed on a white
field.
3 Press COLOR to switch to the color wheel bank and use the appropriate wheel to set the
color value.

Or
Tap COLOR WHEEL in the wheel assignment display and set a value using the numeric
keypad.
4 Press ENTER. The color wheel goes to the new value.

75
Compulite
Chapter 5

5 Press IMAGE to switch to the image wheel bank

6 Use the appropriate wheel to set the gobo.

Or
Select the parameter by pressing the associated parameter key or tap ROTATING GOBO in
the wheel assignment display, and enter a value on the numeric keypad.
7 Press ENTER. The rotating gobo goes to the new value.

Setting values using pickers

Vector has preset pickers for color and image parameters.

Figure 35: Gobo picker

Some pickers have more than one page. Use the PREVIOUS and NEXT buttons to page the picker
dialog box.

In the color pickers, you can design your own custom colors, choose colors from the Roscolux
swatch book, or chose colors from the Lee Designers swatch book.

To set values using pickers

Example: Set a gobo value

1 Select the fixtures.
2 Press IMAGE to switch to the image wheel bank.
Skip this step if the wheel Assignments already show the image parameters.
3 Double click on one of the gobo parameters in the wheel assignments display.
The gobo picker opens.
4 Tap the gobo of your choice.
The choice is immediately applied to the selected fixtures.
5 Tap CLOSE to close the picker.

Or
Open another picker: Select a parameter group and a parameter. The parameter’s picker
opens.

To chose colors from a swatch book

1 Select the fixtures.

76
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

2 Press COLOR to switch to the color wheel bank.

Skip this step if the Wheel Assignments already show the color parameters.
3 Double click on one of the color parameters in the wheel assignments display.
The color picker opens.
4 Open the drop down list and select Roscolux or Lee Designers.
5 Tap the color of your choice.
The choice is immediately applied to the selected fixtures.
6 Tap CLOSE to close the picker.

Setting absolute values

Absolute values are set by selecting a parameter and entering a value on the numeric keypad.

To set values using the numeric keypad

Example: Set dimmer at 60%, pan at 40, tilt at 35, and cyan at 20.
1 Select the fixtures.
2 Press @ 60.
3 Press ENTER.
The dimmer intensity is set to 60%.
4 Press POSITION to switch the wheel bank.
5 Tap PAN to select the parameter.
6 Enter 40 on the numeric keypad.
7 Press ENTER.
The position is updated with the new value.
8 Tap TILT and enter 35 on the numeric keypad.
9 Press ENTER.
The position is updated with the new value
10 Press COLOR to switch the wheel bank.
11 Tap CYAN and enter 20 on the numeric keypad.
12 Press ENTER.
The color is updated with the new value.

77
Compulite
Chapter 5

Quick value keys

Frequently used values have dedicated keys and buttons:

FULL Sets the selected parameter to 100%.

ON Sets the selected parameter to the value set in the System Settings dialog
box. the default value is 50%.

ZERO Sets the selected parameter to 0%.

HOME Sets the selected parameter to its home value. Home values are defined in
the Device Builder.

+@ Increase the parameter level by a specific percent. This button is located

on the Editor toolbar in selection mode.

-@ Decrease the parameter level by a specific percent. This button is located

on the Editor toolbar in selection mode.

Apply last value. The last parameter value chosen remains available until
a new value is set. Thus, you can reuse the same value many times.

Notes: FULL, ON, ZERO, and HOME are immediately output. There is now need to complete the
command by pressing ENTER.

To change the level by a specific percent

1 Make sure the fixture and parameter are selected in the editor.
2 Tap +@ or -@ on the Editor toolbar.
3 Enter a percentage on the numeric keypad. Example: -@ 10 brings the level down 10%.

To apply last parameter value

Example: you selected spots 1 - 6 and set cyan at 20%. You can easily apply the same value to
magenta.
1 Select the spots and select cyan.
2 Press @. and 20 on the keypad.
Cyan is now set to 20%.
3 Select magenta.
4 Press @.
5 Press .
Magenta is now set to 20% also.

78
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

Flip pan and tilt

The flip feature reverses the pan and tilt axes 180 degrees, returning to the fixture’s current position.
This is useful for yokes and fixtures whose heads have 360 degree movement.

Example: In its current position, a yoke is at the limit of its pan movement. To continue moving the
yoke on its pan axis, apply the flip feature. The yoke returns to its current position without the
movement limit.

To flip a fixture

1 Select the fixture(s).

2 Tap FLIP on the Editor toolbar.

Changing pan and tilt orientation

You can change the pan and tilt orientation for any spot without going into the Patch Manager. The
Editor toolbar, in selection mode, has a PAN/TILT PATCH. Tapping this button switches the Editor
toolbar to pan/tilt mode.

Use the buttons in this mode to logically orient the pan and tilt directions to trackball movement.
The buttons are:

INVERT PAN - Switch the full and zero values for pan.

INVERT TILT - Switch the full and zero values for tilt.

SWAP PAN/TILT - Pan becomes tilt and tilt becomes pan.

Parameter grouping
The PARAM GROUPIING button appears on the Editor toolbar in selection mode. When PARAM
GROUPING is enabled all parameters belonging to the same parameter type are active in the editor
when editing any of those parameters. Example: if you are setting levels for cyan, all color parame-
ters are active in the editor and will subsequently be stored in the cue or library.

By disabling parameter grouping, you can isolate a parameter. This allows you to filter libraries or
cues by storing only the selected parameter(s). Example: The color parameter type includes cyan,
magenta, yellow, color wheel 1, and color wheel 2. To store a library or cue that includes only color
wheel 1, set parameter grouping to off and then set the level for color wheel 1.

The parameter grouping default is set in the System Settings dialog box. Parameter grouping can be
toggled on or off from the Editor toolbar. PARAMETER GROUPING always resets to the default
setting in the System Settings dialog box.

To isolate parameters

Example: Parameter grouping is enabled in the System Settings dialog box. You want to store
a beam library that will contain only the iris levels.
1 Select the spots.
2 Tap PARAMETER GROUPING on the Editor toolbar.

79
Compulite
Chapter 5

The command line displays: Parameter Grouping Off.

3 Set the levels for the iris.
Only the iris is active in the editor.
4 Store a library using the usual procedure.
The library contains the iris parameter only.
The parameter grouping setting defaults to on.

Resetting parameter values

Pressing RESET to clear the editor, returns parameter values to either their default stage values or
their home values.

Releasing parameter values

You can release fixtures, single or multiple parameters, or all parameters in the selected bank.
Released parameters and fixtures are not included when storing a cue. Released parameters fade to
default stage values in default release time. See “Default stage values” page 72.

To release fixtures

1 Press RELEASE.
2 Select fixtures.
3 press ENTER.

To release one or more parameters

1 Select fixtures.
2 Select the parameter by tapping the parameter in the wheel display or pressing the param-
eter key.
3 Press RELEASE.

To release all the parameters in a parameter bank

Example: Release all parameters in the color bank.

1 Select fixtures.
2 Press COLOR.
3 Press RELEASE.

Homing parameter levels

Home levels are defined in the Device Builder application for each device type.

To home all active parameters

1 Select the spots.

2 Press HOME.

80
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

To home a selected parameter

1 Select the fixtures.

2 Select a parameter type.
3 Select the parameter.
4 Press HOME. The parameter goes to its home values in default sneak time.

To home parameters grouped in the same wheel bank

Example: Home values for all parameters in the image bank.

1 Select the fixtures.
2 Press IMAGE.
3 Press HOME. The parameters go to their home values in default sneak time.

Programming a home cue

Occasionally a parameter’s home level, as set in the device definition, are not compatible with some
of the fixtures because of, for example, their hanging positions. You can store a fixture specific
home cue, which overrides home levels set in the device definition. Values for fixtures not included
in the home cue go to the values set in the device definition.

To program the home cue

1 Select the fixtures.

2 Select the parameters and set the parameter levels.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press CUE.
5 Press HOME.
6 Press ENTER.

To delete the home cue

1 Press DELETE.
2 Press CUE.
3 Press HOME.
4 Tap DELETE or press ENTER.

To examine the home cue

1 Press EXAM.
2 Press CUE.
3 Press HOME.
4 Press ENTER.

81
Compulite
Chapter 5

Applying last value

The last parameter value chosen remains available until a new value is set. Thus, you can reuse the
same value many times.

To apply last parameter value

Example: you selected spots 1 - 6 and set cyan at 20%. You can easily apply the same value to
magenta.
1 Select the spots and select cyan.
2 Press @. and 20 on the keypad.
Cyan is now set to 20%.
3 Select magenta.
4 Press @.
5 Press .
Magenta is now set to 20% also.

Selecting fixtures using Active

Active is a selection tool. Pressing ACTIVE sets the Editor toolbar to active mode. Use the toolbar
buttons to select fixtures and set conditions for the selections.

Figure 36: The Editor tool bar in active mode

Note: For ACTIVE to work correctly, the command line must be idle. If the command
line is not idle, press ENTER before beginning the active sequences.

You can specify the output source and set conditions for the selection.

Selection sources
There are three sources for fixture selection, using the active feature:
Stage
Editor
Master Playback

82
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

Button What it does

STAGE Grabs all parameters for all fixtures that comprise the lighting
state on the condition that their dimmer values are more than zero.
It is unimportant whether the dimmer value is a hard value or
derived from tracking. This is the default.
EDITOR Grabs everything in the editor.
MASTER PB Grabs the parameters output from the master playback device.

After choosing the source, you can apply conditions to refine the selection.

You can also make selections without specifying the source. The fixtures selected depends on the
console’s current state. If the last selection is still active on the wheel, all fixtures in the last selec-
tion will be selected, See “Resetting the editor” page 72. If there is not last selection all output will
be selected.

Select without specifying a source

Press SHIFT + ACTIVE.

To select all fixtures comprising the lighting state

1 Press ACTIVE.
STAGE is the default.
2 Press ENTER. All the active parameters are under wheel control. They appear in white in
the editor.

To select fixtures output from the editor

Example: Channels 1 -> 10 are output from a pbd, channels 15, 25, 35, 45, 55, are in the editor.
Select only the editor channels.
1 Select channels: CHANNEL 1 55.
2 Press ACTIVE.
3 Press EDITOR. Channels 15, 25, 35, 45, 55, are now under wheel control.
4 Press ENTER.

To select fixtures output from the master playback

1 Press ACTIVE.
2 Tap MASTER PB.
3 Press ENTER.

To select some of the fixtures comprising the lighting state

Example: Channels 1 thru 10 are output from the master playback, channels 70 through 82 are
output from QKey 1, and channels 15, 25, 35, 45, and, 55 are in the editor. Select the channels
from the master playback and the editor.
1 Select channels: CHANNEL 1 55.

83
Compulite
Chapter 5

2 Press ACTIVE.
Channels 1 thru 10, 15, 25, 35, 45, 55 are now under wheel control.
3 Press ENTER.

To remove fixtures from the selection

Example: Channels 1thru 10 are output from a pbd, channels 15, 25, 35, 45, 55, are in the
editor. You want to select all the channels, except channels 8 and 45.
1 Select channels: CHANNEL 1 55.
2 Press — (minus) and 8 on the numeric keypad. Press — (minus) again and 45 on the
numeric keypad. The command line shows the selection.
3 Press ACTIVE. Channels 1 thru 7, 9, 10, 15, 25, 35, 55 are now under wheel control.

Selecting without specifying a source

You can make selections without specifying a source. The fixtures selected depends on the
console’s current state. If the last selection is still active on the wheel, all fixtures in the last selec-
tion will be selected. If not all output will be selected. (See “Resetting the editor” page 72)

To select without specifying a source

Press SHIFT + ACTIVE.

Conditional selections
Once you have chosen the source for your selection, you can filter the selection by choosing
conditions.

Button What it does

INVISIBLE PARAMETERS Grabs parameters not visible onstage because dimmers are at zr.
INACTIVE Grabs fixtures whose parameters are gray (not output from a play-
back device or not active in the editor).
EVERYTHING Grabs all fixtures and parameters, visible and not visible, that are
active in the editor or output from a playback device.
=@ Grabs a parameter at selected level.
<@ Grabs a parameter when it is less than the selected level.
>@ Grabs a parameter when it is more than the selected level.

To grab fixtures not visible on stage

1 Press ACTIVE.
2 Choose the output source.
3 Tap INVISIBLE PARAMETERS.

84
 VECTOR
Selecting and Controlling Fixtures

To grab inactive fixtures

1 Press ACTIVE.
2 Choose the output source.
3 Tap INACTIVE.

To grab fixtures visible and not visible on stage

Fixtures who have no dimmer output are not visible, although parameters other than the
dimmer may be active.
1 Press ACTIVE.
2 Choose the output source.
3 Tap EVERYTHING.

To grab fixtures (parameters) at specified levels

Example 1: Grab all fixtures whose dimmer level is 75%.

1 Press ACTIVE.
2 If necessary, choose the output source.
3 Select the dimmer parameter.
4 Tap =@.
5 Press 7 and 5, on the keypad, to choose the dimmer level.
6 Press ENTER.
Fixtures, from the designated output source, whose dimmer level is 75% are available for
editing.
Example 2: Grab all fixtures whose dimmer level is less than 75%.
1 Press ACTIVE.
2 If necessary, choose the output source.
3 Select the dimmer parameter.
4 Tap <@.
5 Press 7 and 5, on the keypad, to choose the dimmer level.
6 Press ENTER. Fixtures, from the designated output source, whose dimmer level is 75% are
available for editing.
Example 3: Grab all fixtures whose dimmer level is more than 75%.
1 Press ACTIVE.
2 If necessary, choose the output source.
3 Select the dimmer parameter.
4 Tap >@.
5 Press 7 and 5, on the keypad, to choose the dimmer level.
6 Press ENTER. Fixtures, from the designated output source, whose dimmer level is 75% are
available for editing.

85
Compulite
Chapter 5

86
Chapter 6 Programming and Updating Cues
and QLists
All cues are organized into QLists. QLists can be played back on all of Vector’s playback devices.

This chapter contains the following sections:

Working with QLists (see page 87)
Working with cues (see page 89)
Modifying cues (see page 97)
Programming and modification options in tracking mode operation (see page 105)
Fade times (see page 110)
Loops (see page 113)
Linking Cues (see page 115)
Fan (see page 116)
Temporary Cues (see page 118)
Using the faders in channel mode (see page 120)
Blind Mode (see page 121)

Working with QLists

The default QList is the QList where new cues are automatically stored, unless Vector is instructed
to store to some other QList. The default QList is the QList loaded to the master playback.
See “Master playback” page 139. Cues can be stored to QLists resident on all playback devices.

Playback device SELECT keys are used to store QLists and cues.

Vector supports 999 Q-Lists. Playback properties can be defined for individual QLists. See “Setting
Up Playback Devices” page 148

Opening new QLists

New QLists can be opened on the master playback device and on all playback devices. Each new
QList automatically contains cue 0. Cue 0 is an empty cue.

To open a new QList

Example: Open a new QList, QList 1, on the AB crossfader.

1 Press QLIST and 1 on the numeric keypad.

87
Compulite
Chapter 6

2 Press SELECT for AB. The command line shows: Playback AB Assigned. QList 1 will be
output from AB.

Adding text tags to QLists

QLists can be given text tags.

To add text tags to QLists

1 Directly after storing a QList, press TEXT. A text field opens.

2 Type a name on the alphanumeric keyboard.
3 Press ENTER.

OR
1 Select the QList
2 Type a name on the alphanumeric keyboard.
3 Press ENTER.

Deleting QLists
To delete QLists

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the QList.
3 Press DELETE or ENTER.
The Delete confirmation box is displayed.
4 Press DELETE or [Link].

Or
Tap DELETE in the confirmation box. Deleted, displayed in the command line confirms a
successful operation.

Examining QLists
OR
Toggle the QList soft keys to spreadsheet view by tapping . A list of QLists is displayed
in the active pane.

To examine a ist of QLists

1 Press EXAM .
2 Press QLIST.
3 Press ENTER.

OR
Toggle the QList soft keys to spreadsheet view by tapping . A list of QLists is displayed
in the active pane.

88
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

To examine a QList

Example: Exam QList 5.

1 Press EXAM.
The contents of the group are displayed in the active pane.
2 Select QList 5.
3 Press ENTER.

OR
1 If the QList tab is in soft key format, toggle to spreadsheet format.
2 Double click on QList 5.
The contents of the QList are displayed in the active pane.

Copying QLists
All cues in the source QList are copied to the new QList.

To copy a QList

Example: Copy QList 1 to a new QList, QList 21.

1 Select QList 1.
2 Press COPY.
3 Press QLIST and 21.
4 Press PASTE. In the QList soft tab, the text for soft key 21 is: Copy of 1.
5 Optional: rename the new QList.

Working with cues

Programming cues consists of:
Selecting fixtures
Assigning parameter values
Setting the fade times
Storing the resulting lighting state as a cue in a QList.

In Compulite mode, storing a cue does not clear the editor.

In tracking mode, storing a cue clears the editor.

Cues can be numbered from 0.1 to 9999.99.

Much of Vector’s behavior when storing cues, is determined by the settings in the System Settings
dialog box Behavior tab:

89
Compulite
Chapter 6

By default Vector is set to automatically output the stored cue on the master playback device.
You can change this setting in the System Settings dialog box Behavior tab Automatically
Assign to Playback.

The next available number is the current cue number incremented by the number that is set in
the Next Store Increment by Field in System Settings dialog box Behavior tab.
The STORE+ increment is set in the System Settings dialog box.

See “System settings” page 233

Storing cues
When storing cues Vector defaults to the QList on the master playback, so if you are storing cues to
the master playback it is not necessary to specify a QList number.

If no cue number is specified when storing a cue, the next available number in the QList is assigned
to the new cue.

Using STORE and SELECT is a fast way to store cues directly to a playback device.

STORE+ records the editor as the next cue on the master playback device.

To store a cue to the master playback device

Example: Store a cue to the default QList (the QList loaded to the master playback).
1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Enter a cue number on the numeric keypad.
5 Press ENTER.
The cue is automatically added to the QList on the master playback.

OR
1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
The editor is stored to the next available cue number. It is displayed in the command line
with the QList number for the cue on the master playback.

To add cues to the QList on the master playback device

Example: Store a new cue to the default QList (the QList loaded to the master playback).
1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE+.
4 Press ENTER.

90
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

The editor is stored to the next available cue number. It is displayed in the command line
with the QList number for the cue on the master playback.

OR
1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press CUE and press NEXT.
The next available cue number is displayed in the command line with the QList number for
the cue on the master playback.
5 Press ENTER.
The cue is automatically added to the QList on the master playback.

To store a cue to any playback device

Example: Store cue 1 in QList 11. QList 11 is resident in fader 6.

1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press SELECT for fader 6.
The command line shows: Playback 1/6: QList 11 Cue 1 Stored.

OR
1 Select fixtures and assign values
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Select QLIST 11. Skip this step if you are storing this cue to the master playback.
5 Press CUE, 1.
6 Press ENTER.
The command line shows: Playback 1/6: QList 11 Cue 1 Stored.

To add cues to the QList on any playback device

Example 1: Store cue 2 (the next available cue number) in QList 11, loaded on fader 6. The
next cue number is the current cue incremented by one.
1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press SELECT for fader 6.
The command line shows: Playback 1/6: QList 11 Cue 2 Stored.

Note: When storing cues using the default increment, it is not necessary to specify the cue
number before pressing STORE, SELECT.

91
Compulite
Chapter 6

Example 2: The last cue in QList 11 is cue 15. Store cue 20 in QList 11.
1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press QLIST 11. Skip this step if you are storing this cue to the master playback.
5 Press CUE and 20 on the numeric keypad.
6 Press SELECT for fader 6.
The command line shows: Playback 1/6: QList 11 Cue 20 Stored.

To store point cues

Example: Store cue 2.5 in QList 1 that is on the AB playback.

1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press 2 5.
5 Press SELECT.
The command line shows: Playback AB Assigned: QList 1 Cue 2.5 Stored. Cue 2.5 is output
from AB.

Opening new QLists when storing cues

It is possible to store a cue and simultaneously open a new QList. The new QList uses the next
available QList number, which is the last stored QList number incremented by one.

To store a cue and open a QList

Example 1: Open a new QList and store the editor as cue 1.

1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press CUE.
5 Press SELECT for an empty playback device.
A QList, using the next available QList number, is created and the editor group is stored as
cue 1 in this new QList.

92
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

Using soft keys to store cues

Using soft keys for a specific QList greatly enhances programming speed. See “Setting up Soft
Keys” on page 38.

To store a cue to a QList using the soft keys

Example: Store cue 12 to QList 2.

1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Tap 12 in the QList 2 soft key tab.
5 Optional - add a text tag to the cue. Press TEXT to open the Text dialog box.

Using store options

The STORE OPTIONS button, on the Editor toolbar, provides added control over what is stored in
cues. You can choose to store all fixtures active in the editor or just some of them and whether all
parameters for the active spots are stored in the cue or not. The store options always revert to the
default as defined in the System Settings dialog box. STORE OPTIONS is available on the Editor
toolbar in select mode, parameter (levels) mode, and cue mode.

Figure 37: Store options buttons

Store options What is stored

ALL EDITOR (RED + WHITE) All fixture values displayed in red (selected in the editor) and
white (active in the editor) are stored in the cue.

ONLY SELECTED (RED) Only fixture values displayed in red (selected in the editor) are
stored in the cue.

ALL STAGE The entire lighting state is stored in the cue.

ALL PARAMS FOR All parameter values for the selected (displayed in red) spots
SELECTED even if the dimmer is not active in the editor.

ALL PARAMS FOR ACTIVE All parameter values for the active (displayed in red or white)
spots if the dimmer intensity for the fixture is more than zr.

Note: If the dimmer level is set at zr, this is also

considered as active parameter output.

To display the store options

Press STORE OPTIONS on the Editor toolbar. The option buttons are displayed.

Note: STORE OPTIONS, on the Editor toolbar, is available after pressing CUE.

93
Compulite
Chapter 6

Adding text tags to cues

Text tags can be added to cues. Cues’ text tags appear in cue and playback displays.

To add text tags to cues

1 Directly after storing a cue, press TEXT. A text field opens.

2 Type a name on the alphanumeric keyboard.
3 Press ENTER.

OR
1 Press TEXT.
2 Select the QList (skip this if referring to the QList on the master playback).
3 Select the cue.
4 Press ENTER.
The Text dialog box opens.
5 Type a name on the alphanumeric keyboard.
6 Press ENTER or tap OK.

Deleting cues
Individual cues or a range of cues can be deleted from QLists.

To delete a single cue

Example: Delete cue 9 from QList 5.

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select QList 5: QLIST, 5.
3 Select cue 9: CUE, 9.
4 Press DELETE or ENTER.
The Delete confirmation box is displayed.
5 Press DELETE or [Link].

Or
Tap DELETE in the confirmation box.
Deleted, displayed in the command line confirms a successful operation.

To delete a range of cues

Example: Delete cue 9 through 15 from QList 5.

1 Select QList 5: QLIST, 5.
2 Select cues 5 through 9; CUE, 9, ,15.
3 Press DELETE or ENTER.
The Delete confirmation box is displayed.

94
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

4 Press DELETE or [Link].

Or
Tap DELETE in the confirmation box.
Deleted, displayed in the command line confirms a successful operation.

To delete the current cue on the master playback device

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the cue number.
3 Press ENTER.
The Delete confirmation box is displayed.
4 Press DELETE or [Link].

Examining cues
Select cues for examination using the console keys, the soft tabs in spreadsheet mode, or the work-
space nodes. You can also view a track sheet that shows where specific fixtures are used in cues.

When examining cues, parameter levels are displayed using the playback color code. See “Master
playback color code” page 140. The title bar for cue sheet displays shows the playback device
source, if the cue is currently output, and the QList number and name.

To examine a cue

1 Press EXAM.
2 Select the QList. Skip this step if the QList on the master playback.
3 Select the cue.
4 Press ENTER.
The cue details are displayed in the active pane.

To examine a cue using the workspace

See “view cue sheets” page 27

To examine a cue using the soft keys

See “Soft key display” page 39

To view the track sheet

1 Press EXAM.
2 Select a fixture.
3 Tap the side tab labelled Exam.
A list of QLists and the cues, where the selected fixture is active, is displayed.

95
Compulite
Chapter 6

Viewing a QList track sheet

QList track sheets show the cues, the fixtures used in the cues, and the parameter levels in each
QList. You can view channels’ dimmer levels or spots’ parameter levels. You select what is
displayed, by choosing the fixture type and parameter in the controls located in the view pane’s
header.

parameter selection
fixture selection
number of columns displayed

Figure 38: Track sheet controls in the pane header

IMPORTANT! To switch from viewing channels to viewing spot parameters, the view
pane’s header must be visible.

To view a QList track sheet

1 Press EXAM.
2 Select a QList.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Tap the side tab labelled TSheet.
A list of cues, the fixtures in each cue, and the cues where the selected fixture is active is
displayed.
5 To view channels, choose channels in the combo box list in the pane header. To view spots,
select spots in the combo box list in the pane header.
6 Select the parameter that you want to view in the combo box list in the pane header.

Examining fixture usage

Vector tracks patched fixtures that are used in the show and fixtures that are patched, but not used in
the show. The mechanism that tracks this data is groups. Vector creates two groups, one for fixtures
used in the show (group 9001) and one for free fixtures (group 9002). These groups are automati-
cally updated.

To view fixtures used in show - enter syntax

1 Press EXAM.
2 Press SPOT or CHANNEL.
The Editor toolbar is in fixture selection mode.
3 Tap USED IN SHOW.
The fixtures that are used in cues are groups are displayed.
4 Press ENTER.

To view free fixtures - enter syntax

1 Press EXAM.

96
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

2 Press SPOT or CHANNEL.

The Editor toolbar is in fixture selection mode.
3 Tap FREE IN SHOW.
The fixtures that have not been used yet are displayed.
4 Press ENTER.

Copying cues
When copying cues or QLists, you copy the source cue (or QList) to the internal clipboard and then
paste it to the target cue number (or QList).

To copy a cue

1 Select the source QList. Skip this step if the QList on the master playback.
2 Select the source cue.
3 Press COPY to copy the cue to the clipboard.
4 Select the target QList and the new (target) cue number.
5 Press PASTE.
A successful operation is verified in the command line. The new cue’s text is: Copy of QList
# (source QList).

6 Optional - Rename the cue using the text editor.

To copy an entire QList

Example: Copy all the cues from QList 1 to QList 2.

QLIST 1, COPY, QLIST 2, PASTE; The new QList’s text is: Copy of QList # (source QList).

Modifying cues
The STORE and the UPDATE keys can both be used when modifying cues. The key you choose
depends on the type of sequence you have used.

As a rule of thumb, use UPDATE to modify cues that are output on one of the playback devices. Use
STORE for cues that are not output on a playback device.

Updating cues
Use UPDATE to modify cues that are currently output. Pressing UPDATE opens the Update Items
dialog box.

The Update Items dialog box allows you to update cues and libraries. The cues affected by the
update are displayed in the cue column. The libraries affected by the update are displayed in the
library column. You can update all the items that appear in the columns or update items selectively.

Undo is valid for all update actions.

97
Compulite
Chapter 6

Using the Update dialog box options

Option What it does

CUE ONLY The updated value(s) are for the current cue only. When fading to the next
(Tracking mode) cue the updated values return to the tracked value.

BACK TRACK Change the value(s) in all the previous cues.

(Tracking mode)
To update cues using back track

Example: Channel 1 is tracking through the cues at 70%. Update cue 5

for channel 1 at 35% and update the previous cues (cues 1 - 4) with
same value.
1 Select channel 1 and set the intensity to 35%.
2 Press UPDATE. The update items dialog box opens.
3 Tap BACK TRACK.
4 Tap OK. The value for channel 1 is updated in cues 1 - 5.

GRAB NEW New values can be stored to cues currently output from playback devices,
VALUES on the condition that the cues are selected in the Cue column.

New to Master PB New values are stored in the cue output from the master playback. This is
the default.

MASTER PB Updates the cue on the master playback only.

ONLY

UPDATE ALL Updates all libraries where appropriate.

LIBS

Grab new values

The term “new values” refers to values for fixtures or parameters that are not in the cues output
from a playback device. Example:

loaded Channel/ Channel/

Fader Editor Fader
with Output Output

1 QList 1 Cue 1 1 - FL CHAN 1 5 @ 30 1 QList 1 Cue 1 1 - 30

Choosing 4 - 30
GRAB NEW VALUES 5 - 30

2 QList 2 Cue 4 2 - FL results in: 2 QList 2 Cue 4 2 - 30

4 - 30
5 - 30

3 QList 3 Cue 9 3 - FL 3 QList 3 Cue 9 3 - 30

4 - 30
5 - 30

98
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

Notice that the values for channels 1, 2, and 3 are updated in the cues where they originate and not
added to other cues. Channels 4 and 5, which do not appear in the original cues, are added to all of
the cues.

To update cues live 1

Vector’s current output is:

Playback Device QList Cue Spot Dimmer

AB 2 2 10 65
(master playback)

Change the dimmer value for the fixture in QList 2 cue 2 that is output from the A/B playback
device.
1 Select spot 10 and modify the dimmer value.
2 Press ENTER.
The new dimmer value is output.
3 Press UPDATE.
The Update Items dialog box opens.
4 Make sure that AB/QL 2/CUE 2, in the Cue column, is selected.
5 Press UPDATE again or tap OK or press ENTER.
The cue is updated with the editor values.
The dialog box closes.

To update cues live 2

Vector’s current output is:

Playback Device QList Cue Spot Dimmer Pan/Tilt Cyan

AB 2 2 10 Full 50/50
(master playback)

PBD 5 3 3 10 80

Update QList 2 cue 2 (on AB) by changing the pan/tilt values to 60/60.
Update QList 3 cue 3 (on playback device 5) by changing the cyan value to 50.
1 Select spot 10.
2 Set the pan/tilt values to 60/60. Press ENTER.
3 Set the cyan value to 50. Press ENTER.
4 Press UPDATE.
The Update Items dialog box opens.

99
Compulite
Chapter 6

5 Make sure that both AB/QL 2/CUE 2 and PB1/QL 3/CUE 3, that appear in the Cue column,
are selected.
6 Deselect NEW TO MASTER PB.
7 Press UPDATE again or tap OK.
The dialog box closes.
Cues are updated with the editor values for the parameters that originate from each cue.
:The updated output is:

Playback Device QList Cue Spot Dimmer Pan/Tilt Cyan

AB 2 2 10 Full 60/60
(master playback)

PBD 5 3 3 10 50

To update cues live 3

Vector’s current output is:

Playback Device QList Cue Spot Dimmer Pan/Tilt Cyan

AB 2 2 10 Full 50/50
(master playback)

PBD 5 3 3 10 80

Update QList 3 cue 2 (on playback device 5) by changing the pan/tilt values to 60/60.
DO NOT update values in QList 3 cue 3 (on AB).
1 Select spot 10.
2 Set the pan/tilt values to 60/60. Press ENTER.
3 Set the cyan value to 50. Press ENTER.
4 Press UPDATE.
The Update Items dialog box opens.
AB/QL 2/CUE 2 and PB5/QL 3/CUE 3 appear in the Cue column.
Attention! Both cues are selected.
5 Make sure that only PB5/QL 3/CUE 3 selected and tap GRAB NEW VALUES.
6 Press UPDATE again or tap OK.
The dialog box closes. The cue on PB5 is updated.

100
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

The updated output is:

Playback Device QList Cue Spot Dimmer Pan/Tilt Cyan

AB 2 2 10 Full 50/50
(master playback)

PBD 5 3 3 10 60/60 80

Modifying cues that are not output

Modify cues that are not currently output and without entering them to the editor.

To update or overwrite to a cue

1 Select fixtures and assign values.

2 Press ENTER.
3 Press STORE.
4 Select the QList and the cue.
5 Press ENTER.
The Object Exists dialog box opens.
6 Tap UPDATE or OVERWRITE.

Tip! Use the blind editor to update cues and avoid interfering with the lighting state on
stage. See “Blind Mode” page 121

Releasing fixtures or parameters from cues

You can release fixtures or parameters from a range of cues.

When a fixture’s dimmer level is at zr (0%) Vector automatically releases it from the editor or the
cues:
Compulite mode! When a fixture’s dimmer level is set to zr, it is released from the editor and
not stored.
Tracking mode! When a fixture’s dimmer level is set to zr, this is stored in the cue. If the
dimmer level remains unchanged in the next cue, no longer appears. The level zr does not
track. Example: In Cue 1, channel 1 intensity is at 75, in Cue 2, channel 1 intensity is set at zr
and it saved in the cue, in Cue 3 there is no change to channels 1’s intensity therefore is no
longer tracked and does not appear in cue 3.

Note: To change the parameter values’ fade time when releasing fixtures or parameters,
See “Default release time” on page 237.

To release fixtures from a range of cues

1 Select the cues.

2 Press RELEASE.

101
Compulite
Chapter 6

3 Select the fixture(s).

4 Press ENTER.
The selected fixtures are released from the range of cues and the cues are stored.

OR
1 Tap EDIT CUE.
2 Select the cues.
3 Select the fixture(s).
4 Press RELEASE.
5 Press ENTER.
The selected fixtures are released from the range of cues and the cues are stored.

To release parameters from a range of cues

Example: Release the cyan and magenta from cues 1 thorough 6.

1 Press RELEASE.
2 Select the fixture(s).
3 Select cues 1 thorough 6: CUE 1 6.
4 Press COLOR.
The color wheel bank is now available.
5 Tap CYAN and MAGENTA.
6 Press ENTER.
The selected parameters are released from the range of cues and the cues are stored.

OR
1 Tap EDIT CUE.
2 Select the fixture(s).
3 Select the cues.
4 Tap CYAN and MAGENTA.
5 Press RELEASE.
6 Press ENTER.
The selected fixtures are released from the range of cues and the cues are stored.

To change cue text

1 Select the QList and the cue.

2 Press TEXT.
3 In the Text dialog box, overwrite the old text with the new text.
4 Press ENTER.

102
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

Using Delta
A delta contains absolute and relative modifications of spot parameter levels, channel intensity, and
scroller frames. Delta is used to edit cues by pasting the levels in the delta to the target cue. The
levels stored in the delta are grabbed from the editor. The delta feature uses the copy and paste func-
tionality, therefore anything copied to the clipboard overwrites the delta. You can store a new delta
at any point in programming sequences. Vector supports one delta.

Delta options

There are three options when pasting the delta:

Relative - the toolbar always defaults to this option.
Absolute
Add new
Copy new delta
Paste new delta

Figure 39: Editor toolbar in delta mode

Relative delta

DELTA (as copied when TARGET CUE AFTER

TARGET CUE
editing a cue) PASTING DELTA

Channel 1 Absolute: 90 Channel 1 @ 35 Channel 1 @ 65

Relative: +30

Channel 2 Absolute: 90 Channel 2 @ 50 Channel 2 @ FL

Relative: +60

Channel 3 Absolute: 80 Channel 3 @ 30 Channel 3 @ 60

Relative: +30

Channel 4 Absolute: 30 Channel 4 @ 80 Channel 4 @ 40

Relative: -40

Absolute delta

DELTA (as copied when TARGET CUE AFTER

TARGET CUE
editing a cue) PASTING DELTA

Channel 1 Absolute: 90 Channel 1 @ 60 Channel 1 90

Relative: +30

Channel 2 Absolute: 90 Channel 2 @ zr Channel 2 90

Relative: +60

103
Compulite
Chapter 6

DELTA (as copied when TARGET CUE AFTER

TARGET CUE
editing a cue) PASTING DELTA

Channel 3 Absolute: 80 Channel 3 @ 30 Channel 3 80

Relative: +30

Channel 4 Absolute: 30 Channel 4 @ 80 Channel 3 30

Relative: -40

Add New delta

DELTA (as copied when TARGET CUE AFTER

TARGET CUE
editing a cue) PASTING DELTA

Channel 1 Absolute: 90 Channel 1 @ 60 Channel 1 @ 60

Relative: +30

Channel 2 Absolute: 90 Channel 2 @ not in cue Channel 2 @ 90

Relative: +60

Channel 3 Absolute: 80 Channel 3 @ 30 Channel 3 @ 30

Relative: +30

Channel 4 Absolute: 30 Channel 4 @ 80 Channel 4 @ 80

Relative: -40

To copy the delta from the editor

1 Select fixtures and adjust levels.

2 Press @.
3 Press COPY.
The absolute and relative values are copied from the editor to the clipboard and are ready
for pasting.

OR
1 Select fixtures and adjust levels.
2 Press UPDATE.
The Update dialog box opens.
3 Tap COPY NEW DELTA.
The absolute and relative values are copied from the editor to the clipboard and are ready
for pasting.

To paste delta values

Example: Update cues 5 through 9 by pasting the levels in the delta.

1 Press CUE, 5, , 9 to select cues 5 through 9.
2 Press PASTE.

104
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

The cues are updated with the new values.

Note: Using this sequence assumes pasting the relative values in the delta.

OR
1 Select cues.
2 Tap DELTA.
3 Optional: tap RELATIVE, ABSOLUTE, or ADD NEW.
4 Tap PASTE on the delta toolbar.
The cues are updated with the new values.

Programming and modification options in tracking mode

operation
The Editor toolbar, in cue mode, shows buttons for modifying cues in tracking mode.

Figure 40: Editor toolbar in cue mode

Edit cue
The selected cue is loaded to the master playback and its fixtures and levels are active in the editor.
For use in tracking or Compulite modes.

To edit a cue

1 Tap EDIT CUE.

2 Select the QList and the cue.
3 Carry out modifications. Press ENTER.
4 Press UPDATE.
5 Optional - choose one of the options in the dialog box.
6 Press ENTER.
OR
Press CUE # ENTER and continue with step 3.

Load cue
The selected cue is loaded to the editor, but not output from the master playback.

To edit a lighting state

1 Press LOAD CUE.

2 Select the QList and the cue.

105
Compulite
Chapter 6

3 Carry out modifications.

4 Press ENTER.
5 Press UPDATE.
6 Press ENTER.

Load state
The entire lighting state, including all tracked values, is loaded to the editor. This feature can be
used with Compulite mode also. Where appropriate (in tracking mode), new values are back-
tracked.

To edit a lighting state

1 Press LOAD STATE.

2 Select the QList and the cue.
3 Carry out modifications.
4 Press ENTER.
5 Press UPDATE.
6 Press ENTER.

Skip
Values in skip cues or skip parameters are valid only for that particular cue. Fading to the next cue
restores parameter values to the levels used in the cue before the skip cue.

Example: In cues 1 through 5 cyan is set at FL. You insert cue 2.5 with cyan at 50%, which is the
value for this cue only. In cue 3 you want the value to return to tracking (FL). In this case, program
cue 2.5 as a “skip” cue.

Skip cues do not interrupt tracking. Example: In cues 1 through 5 cyan is set at FL. Cue 2.5 is a skip
cue with cyan at 50%. If you go back to cue 1 and adjust the cyan value to 80%, cues 2, 3, 4, and 5
will be updated with the value. The tracking update will ignore the skip cue.

Example: Update the pan value in cue 12 to 65% using the Skip feature.

Original Moves/Tracking Moves/Tracking after Skip

Cue 11 Tracking 80 Cue 11 Tracking 80

Cue 12 Tracking 80 Cue 12 Move 65

Cue 13 Tracking 80 Cue 13 Tracking - Fading from cue 12 to 13, the 80

pan value returns to tracked value.

Cue 14 Tracking 80 Cue 14 Tracking 80

It is also possible to skip specific parameters.

106
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

Example: Skip only the cyan parameter. Do not skip the yellow parameter.

Track or
Cue Cyan Yellow Cue Moves/Tracking after Skip Cyan Yellow
Move

11 Tracking 80 FL 11 Tracking 80 FL

12 Tracking 80 FL 12 Move - Only cyan is set to skip. 65 50

13 Tracking 80 FL 13 • Cyan returns to original 80 50

tracked value.
• Yellow begins tracking from
its new value

14 Tracking 80 FL 14 Tracking 80 50

To program a skip cue

1 Select the cue.

2 Tap SKIP.
3 Press ENTER.

To skip specific parameters

Example: Skip only the cyan parameter. Do not skip the yellow parameter.
1 Select fixtures.
2 Set a value for yellow and press ENTER.
3 Set a value for cyan and press ENTER.
4 Press STORE.
5 Enter the cue number.
6 Make sure that the cyan values appear on a red field and tap SKIP.
7 Press ENTER.

Back track
Change the value(s) in all the previous cues.

To update cues using back track

Example: Channel 1 is tracking through the cues at 70%. Update cue 5 setting channel 1 at
35% and update the previous cues (cues 1 - 4) with same value.
1 Select channel 1 and set the intensity to 35%.
2 Press UPDATE.
The Update Items dialog box opens.
3 Tap BACK TRACK.
4 Tap OK.
The value for channel 1 is updated in cues 1 - 5.

107
Compulite
Chapter 6

Block
(tracking only)
Block cues restart tracking.
Example:

To program a block cue

1 Select the cue.

2 Tap BLOCK.
3 Press ENTER.

Unblock (
Cancel the block cue and reinstate tracking.
Example:

To cancel a block cue

1 Select the cue.

2 Press UNBLOCK.
3 Press ENTER.

Cue only
Updated values are valid only in the current cue. When fading to the next cue, the parameters fade
to their tracked values.

ATTENTION! Cue Only interrupts the tracking. Example: In cues 1 through 5 cyan is set
at FL. Cue 3 is cue only with cyan at 50%. If you go back to cue 1 and adjust the cyan
value to 80%, cues 1 and 2 will be updated with the new value. Since the tracking update
is interrupted at the Cue Only cue, the cyan level in cue 3 will be at FL, its original value.

The last cue in the QList cannot be programmed as Cue Only.

In Tools > System Settings > Behavior, you can set cue only to be Vector’s default behavior for cue
editing.

Example: Update the pan value in cue 12 to 65% using the Cue Only feature.

Original Moves/Tracking Moves/Tracking after updating with Cue Only

Cue 11 Tracking 80 Cue 11 Tracking 80

Cue 12 Tracking 80 Cue 12 Move 65

Cue 13 Tracking 80 Cue 13 Move - Fading from cue 12 to 13, the pan 80
value moves to original value

Cue 14 Tracking 80 Cue 14 Tracking 80

108
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

To store a cue as cue only

1 Select fixtures and assign values.

2 Press ENTER.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press CUE and select a cue number.
5 Tap CUE ONLY.
6 Press ENTER.

Loading cues to the editor

You can load cues to the editor retaining the link between the cue information and the cue or enter
cues to the editor with out retaining the link to the specific cue.

When updating cues, you will want to retain the link to the specific cue. If you are using the cue
information as a building block for a new cue, you will not care about maintaining the original cue’s
identity.

To load a cue to the editor for updating

1 Select the QList and the cue.

2 Press SPOT or CHANNEL.
The cue is now active in the editor and is captured on the master playback.

OR
1 On the Editor toolbar, tap LOAD STATE or LOAD CUE.
2 Select the QList and the cue.
The cue is active in the editor.

To load a cue to the editor and store a new cue

Example: Load cue 5 to the editor, modify the values, and store a new cue.
1 Press CUE and 5 to select the cue.

Or
If the cue is available on a soft key, tap the cue’s soft key.
2 Press ENTER.
3 Modify the values in the editor, add fixtures, or remove fixtures.
4 Press ENTER to see the changes.
5 Press STORE.
6 Press CUE amd enter a number for the new cue.
7 Press ENTER.

109
Compulite
Chapter 6

Fade times
Time-in, time-out, delay-in, delay-out, and wait times may be set for cues and parameters.

If no times are set, the cue default time is used. The default cue time is 2.0 seconds. You can change
the default cue time in: Tools Settings Timing.

Press 0 to set a cut (bump) time.

Key/Button Function

TIME Set the Editor toolbar to cue time mode. Set fade times for the
current cue on the master playback device.

TIME IN On Go, all fixtures fading to higher values begin their fade. The
fade takes place in the set time.

TIME OUT On Go, all fixtures fading to lower values begin their fade. The
fade takes place in the set time.
If no time-out is set, time-out is identical to the time-in setting.

DELAY IN On Go, all fixtures fading to higher values begin to count the
delay time before beginning their fade.

DELAY OUT On Go, all fixtures fading to lower values begin to count the
delay time before beginning their fade.

WAIT Pressing WAIT opens two options on the Editor toolbar:

FOLLOW ON and MANUAL.

FOLLOW ON Fade to the next cue without waiting for a Go command. Loops
use this setting.

MANUAL Wait for a Go command before fading to the next cue. This is the
default.

To set fade times when programming a cue

Example: Program fade times for cue 5 in QList 1.

Time: Time in Time out Delay in Delay out Wait

Set to: 4.5 Default (4.5) 3.0 2.0 No assignment

1 Select fixtures and assign values.

2 Press ENTER.
3 Press STORE.
4 Select QList 1: press QLIST, 1.
5 Press CUE and 5 on the numeric keypad.
6 Press TIME.

110
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

The Editor toolbar is set to time mode.

7 Tap TIME IN and press 4.5 on the numeric keypad.
8 Tap DELAY IN and press 3 on the numeric keypad.
9 Press DELAY OUT and 2 on the numeric keypad.
10 Press ENTER.

To set fade times for a cue

Example: Set 4.5 seconds fade- in time for QList 1 cue 5.

1 Select QList 1.
2 Select cue 5.
3 Press TIME.
The Editor toolbar is set to time mode.
4 Tap TIME IN and press 4.5 on the numeric keypad.
5 Press ENTER.

To set fade times for a range of cues

Example: Set 4.5 seconds fade- in time for QList 1 cues 5 thru 10
1 Select QList 1.
2 Select cues 5 10.
3 Press TIME.
The Editor toolbar is set to time mode.
4 Tap TIME IN and press 4.5 on the numeric keypad.
5 Press ENTER.

To set fade times for the current cue on the master playback device

1 Press TIME.
The Editor toolbar is set to time mode.
2 Tap TIME IN and press the fade time on the numeric keypad.
3 Press ENTER.

To set fade times for parameters

Example: Set a delay-in of 5 seconds for the color wheel.

1 Select the spots and set values.
2 Press ENTER.
3 The values are output.
4 Press COLOR.
The wheel assignments switch to the color bank.
5 Tap COLOR WHEEL or press the color wheel parameter key.

111
Compulite
Chapter 6

6 Press TIME.
The Editor toolbar is now in time mode.
7 Tap DELAY-IN and press 5 on the numeric keypad.
8 Optional - Display the time value in the parameter cell: Format Time.
9 Press ENTER.

To set bank time - - enter syntax

1 Select spots.
2 Select the bank by pressing one of the bank keys (INTENS, POS, COLOR, BEAM, IMAGE,
SHAPE).
3 Press TIME.
The Editor toolbar is now in time mode.
4 Choose a time settting from the Editor toolbar.
5 Use the wheels or the keypad to set the time.
6 Press UPDATE, if editing a cue, or store a new cue.
7 Press ENTER.

To change time values

1 Select the QList and the cue.

2 Press TIME.
3 Tap the time element on the Editor toolbar. and enter the new time values
4 Press ENTER.

To change fade times for parameters

Example: Set a delay-in time of 5 seconds for the color wheel parameter in QL1 Cue 5.
1 Select QList 1 and cue 5.
2 Select spot(s).
3 Press COLOR.
The wheel assignments switch to the color bank.
4 Tap COLOR WHEEL or press the color wheel key.
The Color Wheel parameter is selected.
5 Press TIME.
The Editor toolbar is set to time commands.
6 On the Editor toolbar, press DELAY IN and 5 on the numeric keypad.
7 Press ENTER
The parameter's time assignment is stored in the cue.
8 Optional - To display a time assignment in the parameter cell, choose the time icon in the
Format menu or toolbar.

112
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

Deleting delay times

ATTENTION! Only delay times can be deleted.

To delete delay times

Example: Delete the delete the delay- in time set for cue 3 in QList 1.
1 Select QLists 1 and cue 3.
2 Press TIME.
The Editor toolbar is in time mode.
3 Tap DELAY - IN.
4 Press DELETE.
The delay time is deleted.

Loops
The loop feature strings together sequential cues. Loops can be used within QLists, like mini
chasers, to repeat a series of cues. Cues in loops fade according to their set fade times. Loop infor-
mation is displayed in the cue sheet, the playback displays, and the playback displays.

Loop type About

AUTO LOOP • Pressing GO to fade to the first cue in the loop initiates the entire loop.
The loop runs without any operator interference.
• Can repeat an infinite number of times or can run a specified number of
loops. The default number of repeats is set to infinite. The digit 0 repre-
sents infinite loops.
• When storing auto loops, Vector automatically sets the looped cues’ wait
time as follow-on.

MANUAL LOOP • Requires a GO command for each cue in the loop sequence.
• Can repeat an infinite number of times or can run a specified number of
loops. The default number of repeats is set to infinite.
• The wait time for cues in this type of loop is manual.

AUTO FOLLOW When reaching the end of a loop sequence Vector automatically fades to the
cue that follows the loop. Example: Cues 5 through 10 are set to loop 3
times. When auto follow is set, Vector fades to cue 11 after completing the
loops. This is not a valid selection if the auto loop is infinite.

113
Compulite
Chapter 6

Working with loops

To program an infinite auto loop

Example: Program a loop in QList 1, where cues 5 through 10 automatically loop an infinite.
number of repeats
1 Select QList 1. Skip this step if QList 1 is on the master playback.
2 Select cues 5 through 10: CUE, 5, , 10.
3 Tap LOOP on the Editor toolbar.
4 Press STORE or ENTER.

To program a finite auto loop

Example: Program a loop in QList 1, where cues 5 through 10 loop three times.
1 Select QList 1. Skip this step if QList 1 is on the master playback.
2 Select cues 5 through 10: CUE, 5, , 10.
3 Tap LOOP on the Editor toolbar.
4 Press 3 on the numeric keypad.
On the Editor toolbar, loop count is displayed in orange.
5 Press STORE or ENTER.

To program an infinite manual loop

Example: Program a loop in QList 1, where cues 5 through 10 automatically loop.

1 Select QList 1. Skip this step if QList 1 is on the master playback.
2 Select cues 5 through 10: CUE 5 10.
3 Tap LOOP on the Editor toolbar.
4 Tap MANUAL LOOP.
5 Press STORE or ENTER.

To program an infinite manual loop

Example: Program a loop in QList 1, where cues 5 through 10 automatically loop.

1 Select QList 1. Skip this step if QList 1 is on the master playback.
2 Select cues 5 through 10: CUE 5 10.
3 Tap LOOP on the Editor toolbar.
4 Tap MANUAL LOOP.
5 Press STORE or ENTER.

To program a finite manual loop

Example: Program a loop in QList 1, where cues 5 through 10 automatically loop 6 times.
1 Select QList 1. Skip this step if QList 1 is on the master playback.
2 Select cues 5 through 10: CUE 5 10.

114
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

3 Tap LOOP on the Editor toolbar.

4 Press 6.
5 Tap MANUAL LOOP.
6 Press STORE or ENTER.

To program an auto follow loop

Example: Create a looped chase in QList 1, where cues 5 through 10 automatically loop 6
times. Upon completion the is an automatic fade to cue 11 (the next cue).
1 Select QList 1. Skip this step if QList 1 is on the master playback.
2 Select cues 5 through 10: CUE 5 10.
3 Tap LOOP.
4 Press 6.
5 Tap AUTO FOLLOW.
6 Press STORE or ENTER.

To delete loops

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the first cue in the loop.
3 Tap LOOP.
4 Press ENTER.

Playing back loops

See “Loop playback” page 155

Linking Cues
You can link nonsequential cues.
A forward link skips the cues in between the link. Example: Cue 5 is linked to cue 8. When cue
5 is the current cue, a go command initiates a fade to cue 8. The playback skips cues 6 and 7.
A backward link returns to the first linked cue. Example: Cue 8 is linked to cue 5. When cue 8
is the current cue, a go command initiates a fade to cue 5.

To link cues

Example: Link cue 8 to cue 2.

1 Select cue 8.
2 Tap LINK on the Editor toolbar.
3 Press 2.
4 Press STORE or ENTER.

115
Compulite
Chapter 6

To delete links

Example: Delete the link from cue 8 to cue 2.

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select cue 8.
3 Tap LINK.
4 Press ENTER.

Fan
The fan feature applies spread values to spot parameters, channel intensity, and scroller values
according to their selection order. The parameter wheels are used to assign the spread. Spot param-
eters, scrollers, and channels can be fanned from the side, center, or mirrored.

Fan direction is selected on the Editor toolbar in fan mode:

Fan toolbar What it does

Left- fan from first fixture in selection. The left fan uses the first fixture
in the selection as the base reference. The fan is applied to the rest of the
selection.

Right - fan from last fixture in selection. The right fan uses the first
fixture in the selection as the base reference. The fan is applied to the
rest of the selection.

Center mirror - fan equally from center. This creates a mirror effect.

Center diagonal - fan from last fixture in the selection to center with
ascending values and from center to the first fixture in the selection in
descending values. This can be used to create a seesaw effect with pan
or tilt.

Flip the direction of the spread.

When fan is active the key’s LED is on. Selecting another parameter turns off the fan feature. Press
FAN again to reactivate.

Examples of fan use:

Colors - Apply fan to cyan. The result is light cyan to dark cyan according the selection order.
You can add a fan applied to yellow and get graduated shades of green.
Iris - Applying fan to the iris, when the starting value of the first spot in the selection is a small
iris, gives you beams that ascend or descend in size.

116
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

Fan values can also be set in the Effect Editor.

Tip! Use fan for quick library programming.

Working with the fan feature

Setting the spread

To set a fan spread

1 Select a range of fixtures.

2 Press @ and enter a value range.
The Editor toolbar in now fan mode. Fan right is the default selection.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Optional - change the fan type.
5 Optional - adjust the values using the appropriate parameter wheel
6 Store as a cue.

OR
1 Select a range of fixtures and set values. For spots, select a parameter and set the starting
value. For channels, set the start value.
Start values are the base reference for the fan spread.
2 Press ENTER.
3 Press FAN.
The Editor toolbar in now fan mode.
4 Optional - change the fan type.
5 Use the appropriate parameter wheel to fan the selection.
Vector assigns spread values according to the selected fan type and the fixture selection
order.
6 Store as a cue.

117
Compulite
Chapter 6

Fan timing

Use fan timing to create a quick and simple effect.

Tip! To view the fan time, change the display format to show the time settings: Format
menu > Time.

To set fan timing

1 Select fixtures.
2 Select a parameter and assign values.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Press TIME.
5 Optional - choose DELAY.
6 Enter a time range on the numeric keypad - # #.
7 Press ENTER.
8 Optional - change the fan type.
9 Store as a cue.

OR
1 Select fixtures.
2 Select a parameter and assign values
3 Press ENTER.
4 Press TIME.
5 Optional - choose DELAY.
6 Press FAN.
7 Choose the fan type.
8 Use the parameter wheel to set the time.
9 Store as a cue.

Temporary Cues
Temporary cues are editor groups loaded to an empty playback device. Temporary cues can be
used, in conjunction with the Active feature, as building blocks for cues. Temporary cues can easily
be stored as cues in QLists.

There a two methods for using the faders with temporary cues:
The fader controls the output level from zr - FL, ignoring the values in the editor.
The fixtures are assigned with specific values. The fader controls the output level from zr to
the highest specified level.

118
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

Working with temporary cues

To load a temporary cue

Example: Load the editor to fader 6.

1 Select fixtures.
2 Press SELECT for fader 6
The command line shows: Playback 1/6: Temporary Cue Assigned. The fader controls the
output level from zr - FL.

To load a temporary cue with specific values

Example: Load the editor, with specified values, to fader 6.

1 Select fixtures and assign values.
2 Press STORE.
3 Press SELECT for fader 6.
The command line shows: Playback 1/6: Temporary Cue Assigned. The fader controls
values from zr to the level set for each fixture.

To add fixtures to a temporary cue

Example: Add the editor group to the temporary cue on fader 6.

1 Select fixtures.
2 Press STORE.
3 Press SELECT for fader 6.
The Object Exists dialog box opens.
4 Tap UPDATE.
The new fixtures are added to the temporary cue.

To release fixtures from a temporary cue

Example: Release the fixtures in the editor from the temporary cue on fader 6.
1 Select fixtures.
2 Press STORE.
3 Press SELECT for fader 6.
The Object Exists dialog box opens.
4 Tap RELEASE.
The new fixtures are added to the temporary cue.

To overwrite a temporary cue

Example: Replace the temporary cue on fader 6 with the fixtures selected in the editor.
1 Select fixtures.
2 Press STORE.

119
Compulite
Chapter 6

3 Press SELECT for fader 6.

The Object Exists dialog box opens.
4 Tap OVERWRITE.
The editor contents replaces the fixtures the temporary cue.
5

To name temporary cues

1 Press TEXT. The text dialog box opens.

2 Press SELECT for the playback device with the temporary cue.
3 Use the keyboard to type the group’s name.
4 Tap OK.

To convert a temporary cue to a cue and open a new QList

Scenario: The show contains QLists 1- 3. Covert the temporary cue on fader 6 to cue 1 in a
new QList, which will be QList 4, and store the active editor group as cue 2 in QList 4.
1 There is a temporary cue already loaded to fader 6.
2 Select fixtures and assign values.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press select for fader 6.
The Object Exists dialog box opens.
5 Choose Create New QList.
The dialog box closes.
The command line shows: QList 4 Cue 2 Assigned. The new QList now has two cues; the
original temporary cue is now cue 1.

Using the faders in channel mode

You can create a look using the faders in channel mode and then store the look as a cue.

When the faders are in channel mode, each fader controls one channel. The number of fader pages
available are as many pages as necessary for the number of channels.

Setting a channel level by moving a fader off its bottom end stop, enters the channel to the editor.
Pressing RESET, fades the channel to zr in default sneak time. The fader automatically returns to its
bottom end stop.

Working in channel mode

To switch faders to channel mode

Press CHANNEL (located to the left of the faders)

120
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

To set levels and store a cue

1 Press CHANNEL (located to the left of the faders) to set the faders to channel mode.
2 If necessary, page to the channel needed.
3 Bring channels into the editor by setting levels using the faders.
4 Store a cue using STORE+

Or
QLIST # CUE # STORE, or STORE SELECT.
5 Press RESET to release the channels from the editor.

Blind Mode
You can program and modify cues in blind mode. When blind mode is active, the fixture values in
the editor are not output.

Using the blind editor

To activate the blind editor

Press BLIND. The key’s LED is on.

To store cues in blind mode

1 Press BLIND to enter the blind editor.

2 Select fixtures and assign values.
3 Use any store sequence, including STORE SELECT.

To exit blind mode

Press BLIND. The key’s LED is off.

121
Compulite
Chapter 6

122
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

123
Compulite
Chapter 6

124
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

125
Compulite
Chapter 6

126
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

127
Compulite
Chapter 6

128
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

129
Compulite
Chapter 6

130
 VECTOR
Programming and Updating Cues and QLists

131
Compulite
Chapter 6

132
Chapter 7 Playback Devices and QList
Playback
This chapter includes the following sections:
About playback devices (see page 133)
Playback priorities (see page 136)
Loading and freeing playback devices (see page 138)
Master playback (see page 139)
Playback device controls (see page 141)
General master (see page 143)
Playback displays (see page 144)
Setting Up Playback Devices (see page 148)
Controlling fade rates (see page 154)
Loop playback (see page 155)
Snaps (see page 160)
Chases (see page 157)

About playback devices

Vector's playback devices are:
A/B crossfader
Motorized faders
QKeys

All playback devices have a SELECT key that allows loading a QList or a temporary cue and also
serves to designate the master playback device, See “Master playback” page 139. Each SELECT
key has a LED. When the playback device is designated as the master playback the LED is on.

Each playback device has a LED above the SELECT key. The LED’s color represents load types.

LED Color Load

Green QList

Red chase

Yellow temporary cue

133
Compulite
Chapter 7

The default set up for the playback devices’ control keys and faders can be changed. See “Setting
Up Playback Devices” page 148

A/B crossfader
The A/B crossfader. is the default master playback. When A/B is set as the master playback, the
master playback dedicated control keys execute playback functions for A/B. See “Master playback”
page 139.

When A/B is not the master playback device, the default key functions are:
HOLD/BACK - left key
GO - right key

The key and fader functions can be changed in the Playback Properties dialog box > Playback Defi-
nitions tab. See “Playback Properties dialog box - Playback Definitions tab” page 150

The crossfader can work in dipless mode, where:

In fader - fades incoming values.
Out fader - fades outgoing values.

The crossfader can also work in dip mode, where:

In fader - fades incoming values.
Out fader - blacks out the HTP output. In effect, it works like a submaster.

To change the crossfader mode

1 Open the Tools menu.

2 Choose Settings.
3 Tap DIP XFADE to toggle between enable or disable.

Faders

Figure 41: Motorized fader with related keys and displays

The motorized faders work in four modes:
Playback - The faders are intensity masters.
Rate - The faders are rate masters.

134
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Channel - Each fader controls one channel. Channel pages are unlimited.
Parameter - (not implemented yet)

Fader modes are global, affecting all of the faders, unless specified otherwise in the Playback
Properties dialog box.

Each fader has a programmable flash key and two programmable control keys. The fader function
can also be changed. The fader control keys and fader functions are configured in Playback Defini-
tions tab of the Playback Properties dialog box.

The default functions are:

Figure 42: Faders and control keys

Paging faders

There are 5 fader pages for Vector Red. There are 10 fader pages for Vector Blue and Vector Green.

Faders remember their level on each page and jump to that position when paging. Example: On
page 1 fader 8 is set at 50% and on page 2 fader 8 is at full. Going form page 2 to page 1, the fader
jumps to 50%. Going to page 2 the fader moves to full.

To page faders

to page up; the page number appears in the faders' LCD display and on the playback wing
displays.
to page down; the page number appears in the faders' LCD display and on the playback wing
displays.

Note: When paging the wing faders, the QKeys are also paged in the background.

Playback color code

All values output from the faders and QKeys are shown in yellow in the live spot and channel
displays. Values output from the master playback device are color coded in more detail.
See “Master playback color code” page 140

Playback wing display color code

Load Playback device color

No load The background color is gray.

135
Compulite
Chapter 7

Playback wing display color code

Load Playback device color

Load The background color is black.

QList The playback device number is green.

Chaser The playback device number is red.

Temporary cue The playback device number is yellow.

Qkeys
QKeys, located below the touch screens, are playback devices without a physical fader. Each QKey
has an associated SELECT key and one programmable control key.

There are 10 Qkey pages.

Note: When paging the QKeys, the faders are also paged although they are hidden.

Playback control key LEDs

Key LED

Go (upper key) • LED blinking - A fade is in progress.

• LED on - The playback device has active output. No fade is in progress.
• LED off - There is nothing loaded on the pbd or there is no output.

Back / Hold • LED blinking - A fade is in progress.

(lower key) • LED on - The playback device is paused.

Playback priorities
Output priority is determined by playback priority maps. Vector contains two such maps.
LTP priority
Ordered priority.

The priority map is set in the System Settings dialog box, Behavior tab.

In LTP, all playbacks are of equal priority and are mapped to the same priority number. The last
device that executed a playback command grabs priority. LTP is the default priority.

The default priority mapping for LTP is:

A/B is priority 1 (the lowest priority).
All Playbacks and QKeys are priority 11.

136
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

In ordered priority, playback devices are set for a rigid hierarchy. Devices are mapped to a unique
priority number or groups of devices may be mapped to the same priority number. The priority
range for playback devices is 1 - 210.

The default priority mapping for ordered priority is:

A/B - 1
All QKeys - 10
All faders - 11 through 110

To select the priority map

1 Go to Tools Settings Behavior tab.

2 Tap ORDERED PLAYBACK PRIORITY. When this button is enabled (light colored), the
Ordered priority map is active. When this button is disabled (dark colored), Vector works
under the LTP priority map.

Mapping specific playback devices

You can also map the priority for specific playback devices.

Note: If the priority type map is changed in the System Settings dialog box, the priori-
ties mapped by the operator are overridden by the default map.

Priorities for specific playback devices are mapped in the Setup dialog box in the Playback Defini-
tions tab.

Figure 43: Playback Definitions - Properties group

Operator defined priority maps are stored in snaps and restored when the snap is applied.

ATTENTION!
Playback devices mapped to the same priority become an LTP group (they adopt LTP
behavior within the group) regardless of the priority map chosen in the Systems Settings
dialog box.
Playbacks that have different priorities do not adopt LTP behavior, even when the default
priority map is LTP.

137
Compulite
Chapter 7

To map specific playback devices with unique priority

1 Open the Playback Properties dialog box, by pressing SETUP and then SELECT for the
playback device.
2 Tap the Playback Definitions tab.
3 In the Properties group, tap the up or down arrow buttons until the required priority number
is displayed in the Priority field.
4 Tap STORE to exit the dialog and store the new priority setting.

Loading and freeing playback devices

To playback QLists they must be loaded to a playback device. Each fader can host only one QList
to a page. Different QLists can be loaded to the same fader on different pages. Example: load QList
3 to pbwing 1 fader 1, go to page 2 and load QList 13 to pbwing 1 fader 11 (fader 1 one page one),
etc.

Groups and fixtures can also be loaded to faders. Text tags can be added to groups, cues, and
temporary cues that are output from the faders.

To load a QList to a playback device

1 Choose the QList: QLIST #.

2 Press SELECT for a playback device.
The QList is loaded to the selected device. The LED above the SELECT key is lit; it is
green.

To load a group to a playback device

1 Choose the group.

2 Press SELECT for a playback device. The QList is loaded to the selected device. The LED
above the SELECT key is lit; it is orange.

To load fixtures

See “Temporary Cues” page 118

To free one playback device

FREE, SELECT; the playback device’s LED is extinguished.

To free all the playback devices:

1 Press and hold FREE

2 Press SELECT for as many playback devices as you want. The load LEDs are extinguished.

Or
3 Press FREE twice to lock. When locked the key's LED blinks.
4 SELECT (for any playback device).

138
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

5 Any key press (except SELECT) releases the FREE lock.

Add text tags to groups, cues, or temporary cues that are output from a playback device.

To add text tags to objects on a playback device

1 Press TEXT.
2 Press SELECT for the playback device where the object is located.
The Text dialog box opens.
3 Type text.
4 Tap OK.

Master playback
The master playback is the default playback device. The QList resident on the master playback is
the default QList. See “Working with QLists” page 87

The A/B crossfader or any other fader can be designated the master playback device. The desig-
nated master playback device is shown in the playback displays with on a green field. The playback
keys, located above and below the master playback LCD, are dedicated to master playback control.
The LCD display shows the current and next cues on the master playback:

Key What it does

GOTO Initiates a fade to a selected cue.

HOLD Pauses an ongoing fade.

BACK
Fades one cue back.

GO
Initiates a fade or starts a chase. When pressed during a fade,
immediately initiates a fade to the next cue in the sequence.

To designate the master playback

Press the SELECT key twice; the key's LED is lit.

139
Compulite
Chapter 7

Master playback color code

Parameter Levels are shown in the live spot and channel displays. They are color coded. While a
fade is in progress, the color code for values output from the master playback show the levels
fading up, fading down or remaining unchanged.

LED Color Parameter levels

Red • Compulite mode: Values remain unchanged from the previous cue.
• Tracking mode: Values saved in the current cue are the same values as in the
previous cue.

Blue Values fading to a higher value.

Green Values fading to a lower value.

Purple Tracked values. (Tracking mode only)

Fading cues out of sequence on the master playback

Vector’s default settings allow using GO or GOTO to play cues out of sequence.

To play a cue out of sequence using GO or GOTO

Example: Cue 5 is current on the master playback. Fade to cue 20.

CUE 20, GO; initiates a fade to cue 20 in its cue time, executing attached macros and param-
eter time settings.
CUE 20 GOTO; fade to specified cue 20 in the default GOTO time. See “Default GOTO time”
page 237
CUE 20 TIME # GOTO; fade to the cue in the specified time

CUE 20 TIME GOTO; respect all time settings and execute macros (if any).

Changing the GO key function

The functionality of the GO key can changed to prevent using the GO key to fade cues out of
sequence. This is useful when you want to prepare an out of sequence fade, but, in the meantime,
continue fading through the normal cue sequence.

Scenario: The current cue is cue 4. you are planning to fade to cue 20 after the fade to cue 10is
complete. Select cue 20; the selection is displayed in the command line. Continue pressing GO until
the fade to cue 10 is complete. Now press GOTO to fade to cue 20.

To change the GO key function

Go to Tools Settings Behavior and disable GO AS GOTO WITH CUE TIME.

140
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Fading cues on the playback devices

Playback devices include the faders, QKeys, and A/B crossfader. Each playback device has keys for
playback control. By default the keys are defined as Go and Hold.

To fade to the next cue

Press the Go key.

Playback device controls

The playback device function controls provide expanded functionality for playback devices. The
function can be applied to single playback devices or to a group of playback devices.

Key Name What it does and how to use it

JOIN Links (joins) a number of playback devices, allowing you to start fades on
multiple playback devices with a single go command.

To join playback devices

1 Press JOIN. The key’s LED blinks.

2 Press SELECT for each participating playback device. The device’s
LED flashes red when joined.

To release a playback device from join

When join is active, press SELECT for the fader you want to remove. The
fader’s LED is no longer red.

To release all playback devices from join

Press JOIN and then RELEASE.

PRIORITY Not implemented yet.

SUBMASTER Set a fader to act as an inhibitive submaster for fixtures.

To set inhibitive submasters

1 Select fixtures.
2 Press SUBMASTER.
3 Press SELECT for a fader.

Auto Not implemented yet.

SEQ(uence) Not implemented yet

141
Compulite
Chapter 7

Key Name What it does and how to use it

FREE Free QLists and temporary cues loaded on playback devices. See “Loading and
freeing playback devices” page 138

ON Not implemented yet.

SOLO Black out all playback device output except the selected pbd. Solo can fade or
bump the output.

To use solo by fading

1 Press SOLO.
2 Press SELECT for the solo playback device.
All output except selected fades to blackout. The output from the
selected device fades to the dimmer level set by the fader. Example: If
the fader is at 80%, the solo output will not be more than 80%.

To use solo by bumping

1 Press SOLO.
2 Press the flash key for the playback device.
All output except selected bumps to black. The output from the
selected device jumps to the fixture’s stored dimmer levels regardless
of the fader level.

To lock solo

Hit SOLO twice to lock they key. Press SELECT or the flash key for any
playback device to solo the fader’s output.

To unlock solo

Press RESET
STEP • STEP SELECT Lock the fader’s Go key to step through a chase.
• STEP SELECT GO Release step mode.
• STEP STEP Lock the key.
PB RELEASE • PB RELEASE + SELECT Release the playback device's output without free-
ing the playback device.
• PB RELEASE Release all playback devices.
• SHIFT + PB RELEASE Release all playback devices.
• PB RELEASE SELECT Release all playback devices from the first
selected to the last loaded pbd.A double press on
• A double hit on PB RELEASE locks the key.

142
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Key Name What it does and how to use it

GO A generic go key. Use this key when there is no dedicated go key for a fader or
QKey. Give a go command simultaneously to more than one playback device.
• GO SELECT; Fade to next cue start an effect or a chase on the selected pbd.
• Hold down GO and press SELECT (for as many pbds as you want). Fade to
next cues, start effects or chases on the selected pbds.
• SHIFT + GO; starts all playback devices.
• A double press on GO locks the key.

|| / Pause or restart the fade running on the selected fader.

Reverse sequence direction for the QList on the selected faders. Generally used
with chases.

Many of the playback function keys can be locked to allow choosing more than one fader’s
SELECT key. When locked, the key's LED blinks. When the key has been pressed, and not locked,
the LED is on. The LED is extinguished after choosing a SELECT key.

To lock a function key

A double hit on the key locks it.

To free a locked key

Pressing any key (except SELECT) frees the lock.

General master
The general master and its associated blackout key, control Vector’s overall dimmer output. When
the grand master is at its bottom end stop, all dimmer output is set to zero. When the general master
is at the top of its travel, all dimmer output is at maximum level.

The grand master can be disabled in the System Settings dialog. See “Advanced Setup Features”
page 233.

General master status is displayed in the command line’s status bar.

To blackout all dimmer output

Press B.O. The key’s LED is on and the GM status is displayed in red in the status line.

OR
Move the general master slider to 0%.

To cancel the GM blackout

Press B.O. The key’s LED is off and the GM level is displayed in the status line.

OR

143
Compulite
Chapter 7

Return the general master slider to 100%.

Playback displays
Playback device displays are opened from the workspace. Playback displays include:
:

Wing 1 Master (playback device)

Wing 2 Individual playback devices

Qkeys 1 Individual QKey devices

Qkeys 2 Attachments to cues running on the master playback device

AB Playback
Note: PB Q-KEY/ DISPLAY toggles between Wing and QKey displays.

Playback device displays

A pane can be set aside for exclusive use by a playback display or it can tabbed within a pane. The
displays have side headers. The side headers can be organized through the Grid Properties dialog
box. Columns can be resized and headers can be hidden using the options in the View menu.
See “Grid properties” page 40.

Playback wing and QKeys

Figure 44: Playback wing 1 display (partial)

144
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Header options for each wing or QKey display

Header What is displayed

PB The playback device number is displayed as Page number / Device number.

Indications showing the playback status (such as pause, reverse direction,
etc.) are displayed in this field as required.

Figure 45: Indications, showing the playback status, appear next to the
playback device identifier.

Level/Prio(rity) Fader level and place in the priority stack.

Note: The level and priority can be displayed in separate fields.

Type Normal sequencing QList or a chase.

QList The Qlist number and text.

Current cue The active cue’s number and text.

Next cue The incoming cue’s number and text.

Next cue times The fade times for the incoming cue.

Fader function See “Playback Properties dialog box - Playback Definitions tab” page 150.

Rate The fade rate for the playback device.

Key functions See “Playback Properties dialog box - Playback Definitions tab” page 150.

Playback device displays

Cue sheets, current cue exams, and next cue (preview) exams can be displayed for individual
faders, individual QKeys, and A/B. Set aside a pane for displaying a cue sheet or display a cue sheet
in a tabbed pane. Cue information is organized with top headers and side tabs. Cue sheets show a
fade progress bar that highlights the active cue.
The master playback and A/B have an additional tab in the display. the PB tab has side headers
(See “Header options for each wing or QKey display” page 145), a red bar that hight lights the
active cue and shows fade progress, and indications showing the playback status (such as pause,
reverse direction, etc.) are displayed in this field as required.

145
Compulite
Chapter 7

Tab What it shows

PB Optional fields: See “Grid properties”

• PB • Next cue times page 40
• Level/Prio • Fader function Note: This tab is present
only in A/B and Master
• Type • Rate playback display
• QList • Key functions
• Current Cue • Level
• Next cue • Priority

Cue Sheet Optional fields: See “Grid properties”

• Cue number • Link to page 40
• Cue name • Loop
• Time in • Trigger
• Time out • Fade progress
• Delay In • Order
• Delay out • Time code
• Wait

Exam The fixtures and parameter levels for the current cue.

Preview The fixtures and parameter levels for the incoming cue.

Figure 46: Playback device display for PB1/1

Figure 47: Master playback or A/B display

To show playback wings

1 Activate a pane.

146
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

2 Open the workspace. Skip this step if the workspace is open.

3 Tap Playback
4 Tap Wing 1or Wing 2.

To show QKeys

1 Activate a pane.
2 Open the workspace. Skip this step if the workspace is open.
3 Tap Playback
4 Tap Qkeys 1 or QKeys 2.

To show A/B

1 Activate a pane.
2 Open the workspace. Skip this step if the workspace is open.
3 Expand Playback
4 Tap A/B.
5 Tap the Cue Sheet tab.

To view the Qkey display

Press PB /QKEY DISPLAY; toggle the playback wing display between faders and Q-keys.

To show a cue sheet for a playback device or QKey

Example: Show the QList on playback device 4.

1 Activate a pane.
2 Open the workspace. Skip this step if the workspace is open.
3 Expand Playback
4 Expand Wing 1.
5 Tap PB 4.

OR
1 Press EXAM.
2 Press the SELECT key for playback device 4.

To show the master playback

1 Activate a pane.
2 Open the workspace. Skip this step if the workspace is open.
3 Expand Playback
4 Tap Master.

Note: If the PB field is displayed, the master playback device is highlighted in green.

147
Compulite
Chapter 7

Setting Up Playback Devices

The Playback Properties dialog box is used to customize the control keys and fader default func-
tions and also to control QList playback behavior.
Assignment Properties tab - control QList playback behavior.

Playback Definitions tab - control keys and fader function.

All playback device settings are saved with snaps.

Playback Properties dialog box - Assignment Properties tab

Data entered on the Assignment Properties tab are stored as properties of QLists. Example: Change
the playback mode to chase. The QList is always a chase no matter where it is loaded.

The Assignment Properties tab is available only when there is a QList loaded on the selected play-
back device.

Figure 48: Playback Properties dialog box, Assignment Properties tab

QLists load property What it does

QList Mode Normal Cues run in sequence, according to cue timing,

responding to manual Go commands.

Chase Cues fade automatically after the initial Go

command. All cues are considered chase steps.

148
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

QLists load property What it does

Go Behavior Exit Loop Pressing GO during a loop, exits the loop and
initiates a fade to the next cue or the next loop.

Exit Loop at End The loop completes its final step and then auto-
matically fades to next cue or the next loop.

Restart Loop In normal and chase modes, pressing GO inter-

rupts the loop and begins a fade to first cue in the
loop.

Stop at Next Cue In normal and chase modes, pressing GO advances

to the next cue or step and holds.
Insert mark cue at Set a cue, at the top of the cue list, to look ahead and preposition
top of list fixtures and scrollers.
Cue only list Cue Only stores only the moves in the cue and does not track the
lighting state.
Back to top on After release, QLists are restart to the first cue.
release

Calculate state Off - Only fixture parameter moves appear on stage.

On - The entire lighting state appears on stage.

Do not calculate with Do not calculate tracking when jumping out of sequence i.e. loops,
jumps using GOTO, or Cue # GO.
Sequence • Enabled - The cues fade in sequence with each go command.
• Disabled - The cues do not sequence.
Note: The Indications, in playback displays, show the Sequence status.

Trigger • Enabled - Fading to a cue triggers attached macros and snaps.

• Disabled - Attached macros and snaps are not triggered.

Restore default Reset the show defaults. If no show defaults were saved the system
defaults are referenced.
Set as default Save the current settings as the show defaults.

To set QList and chase properties

1 Press SETUP.
2 Press the SELECT key for a playback device. The Playback Properties dialog box opens.
3 Choose the options in the fields.
4 Tap STORE to exit the dialog box and save QList load properties.

149
Compulite
Chapter 7

Playback Properties dialog box - Playback Definitions tab

Figure 49: Playback Properties dialog box, Playback Definitions tab

Playback Definitions tab - Control keys and Flash key behavior

NONE The key is disabled.

GO Initiates a fade.
HOLD Pauses a fade.
HOLD/BACK • First press pauses a fade.
• Second press fades to the previous cue.
ON/OFF Toggles the cue On (Go) or Off (Release). This is especially useful
with QKeys.
Note: The Back to top on release setting controls what happens
when the cue is released.

RELEASE Releases the playback device.

Step << Jump to the previous cue. Not implemented yet.
Step >> Jump to the next cue. Not implemented yet.
FLASH Flash (bump) the cue on the fader.
Sequence on/off Toggle cue sequencing to on or off. Not implemented yet.
Trigger on/off Enable/disable automatic triggering of macros attached to cues. Not
implemented yet.

Reverse the sequencing direction. Not implemented yet.

Freeze Freeze chases or effects running on the [Link] implemented yet.
Solo Pressing the flash key bumps or fades out other output. Not imple-
mented yet.
BACK Fade to the previous cue.
Hold/Release Not implemented yet.

150
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Playback Definitions tab - Fader Behavior

NONE The fader is disabled.

INTENSITY MASTER The fader controls the intensity. Moving the fader off its bottom end
stop raises value levels. When the fader is at the top of its travel,
parameter values are at their maximum values.
X- FADER IN The fader controls values to fading up.
X- fader out The fader controls values fading down. Not implemented yet.
RATE MASTER The fader operates as a rate master.
FLASH MASTER The fader level inhibits the maximum level reached when using flash
(bump).Not implemented yet.
All Parameters Not implemented yet
Blackout Not implemented yet
A/B master Not implemented yet. The fader operates as a general intensity master
for output from A/B.

Playback Definitions tab - Properties group

EXCLUDE FROM SNAP The pbd is not stored in snaps.

EXCLUDE FROM PAGING This fader is parked and doesn’t page with the rest of the pbd’s.
Exclude from active Functions using active will not grab output from this fader.
Set as System Default Not implemented yet.
htp Set for Highest Takes Precedence.
PRIORITY Use the arrow keys to set a unique priority level for the selected
playback device.
PREVENT SNAP The playback load is locked cannot be overwritten by snaps.
OVERRIDE Example: House lights are on pbd 1 and podium lights are one
pbd2. To avoid overwriting these assignments set to prevent
snap override.

Playback Definitions tab - Behavior group

FLASH BEHAVIOR Release on Release - Releasing the flash key, releases the
dimmer.

151
Compulite
Chapter 7

Playback Definitions tab - Behavior group

Pure LTP - Pressing the flash key grabs the priority. The play-
back device retains priority even after releasing the flash key.

Solo - not implemented yet

Go on Flash - Pressing the flash key bumps to the next cue and
flashes the dimmer value.

Latch- not implemented yet

INTENSITY BEHAVIOR Intensity Only - the fader controls the only the dimmer value.

Go+Fade Parameters - Moving the fader off its bottom stop,

initiates a fade to the next cue in the QList. The speed of the
fader movement controls the timing for the dimmer fade. The
parameter values fade according to Vector’s default cue time.

Go+Jump Parameters - Moving the fader off its bottom stop,

bumps to the next cue in the QList. The speed of the fader move-
ment controls the timing for the dimmer fade. The parameter
values bump in.
RELEASE AT BOTTOM Each time the fader is moved to its bottom stop, the parameter
values output from this fader are released.

152
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Playback control groupings

Faders and their control keys can be setup in playback control groups.

Example:

Playback Device Function Comments

Fader 1 Intensity master Faders 1 - 4 are now a mega playback device.

Note: The control keys for each fader can also have
Fader 2 X-fader (In)
unique setups.
Fader 3 X-fader (Out) Always load the QList to the first fader in the
Fader 4 Rate Master control group, in this example the QList would be
loaded to fader 1.

Figure 50: Faders 1 - 4 set up as a group of controls in the Setup dialog box

To set fader and key functions

1 Press SETUP.
2 Press the SELECT key for a playback device. The Playback Properties dialog box opens.
3 Tap the Playback Definitions tab.
4 Tap the square under the fader to enable.
5 Click on a key or a fader.
The fly-out list shows the options.
6 Tap the function.
7 Tap CLOSE or STORE to exit the dialog box and save playback device settings.

To setup split crossfaders

Example: Set fader 1 as the “In” fader and fader 2 as the “Out” fader.
1 Tap the Playback Definitions tab.

153
Compulite
Chapter 7

2 Press SETUP and then SELECT for fader 1. The Playback Properties dialog box opens.
3 In the dialog box, tap the slider handle for fader 1 and choose X-FADER (IN) from the
flyout menu.
4 Enable fader 2 by tapping on the rectangle under the square representing the push key.
5 Tap the slider for fader 2 and choose X-FADER (OUT) from the flyout menu.
6 Tap CLOSE. Now faders 1 and 2 are setup as split crossfaders.

Controlling fade rates

Fade rates can be controlled by setting the faders to function as a rate faders, putting a specific play-
back device under rate wheel control, or putting all the playback devices, globally, under rate
control.

Global rate control uses both the options on the toolbar and the wheels.

Using the faders for rate control

The fader function mode can be switched to rate control. When switching faders to rate control, the
faders automatically jump to 100, the default cue time. Moving the fader up increases the fade rate.
Moving the fader down decreases the fade rate. At its bottom stop the fade is paused.

To set faders to rate control

Press RATE. The faders jump to the default rate level (100).

Using wheels for rate control

You can control the rate for one or more than one playback device. Also, all playback devices can
be put under global rate control.

Pressing RATE, switches the first three wheels to rate mode. The wheels in rate mode are:
Wheel 1 - Chase Rate
Wheel 2 - xFade
Wheel 3 - Int Limit

To use global rate control

Press RATE; The Editor toolbar is now in rate mode and the wheels control rates. The wheels
and the toolbar buttons affect all playback devices.

To exit global rate control

Press SHIFT + RATE. Playback device rates are reset.

To put a specific playback device under rate control

1 Press RATE (the large key next to BEAT).

154
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

2 Press SELECT for the specific playback device.

Note: To bring additional playback devices under rate control, press their
SELECT keys.

3 Use the CHASE RATE wheel to control the fade rate on the selected chase or use the
toolbar buttons.

Using the rate mode toolbar

The rate mode buttons on the Editor toolbar toggle between to freezing and restarting chases and
effects. These buttons are always applied globally to all playback devices.

Pressing RATE, switches the Editor toolbar to rate mode. The buttons in rate mode are:
FREEZE ALL - toggles freezing and running all active chases and effects.

FREEZE CHASE - toggles freezing and running all active chases.

FREEZE EFFECT - toggles freezing and running all active effects.

Loop playback
The cue sheet displays show loop information. The cue sheet for a QList loaded to a playback
device, shows a progress bar and, when the loop is running, the loop countdown.

You can begin a loop from any cue in the loop or jump to a cue without exiting the loop.

Figure 51: Playback display cue sheet with loop assignment

To playback a loop

Press GO to initiate the loop.

To start from any cue in the loop

Example: Cues 3 through 6 are looped. Begin the loop from cue 5.
Select cue 5 and press GO.

Exiting loops
You can exit a loop at any point in a loop’s progress and fade to the cue immediately following the
loop or to any cue in the QList.

The fade to exit cue can executes in cue time or in default GOTO time. See “Default GOTO time”
page 237.

155
Compulite
Chapter 7

The default behavior, when exiting loops, can be set in the Playback Properties dialog box. The
options are:
Exit Loop
Exit Loop at End
Restart Loop
Stop at Next Cue

See “Playback Properties dialog box - Assignment Properties tab” page 148

To exit a loop using GO

Note: In the following examples, the go behavior is set to Exit Loop. This is the default
behavior.

Example 1: Exit to the cue immediately following the loop, executing the fade in the cue time.
Press GO.
Example 2: Exit to a cue that is not directly after the loop, executing the fade in the cue time.
Select the cue and press GO.
Example 3: Exit to a cue that fades in a specified time.
1 Select the cue.
2 Press time and enter a time on the numeric keypad.
3 Press GO.

To exit a loop using GOTO

Example 1: Exit to the cue immediately following the loop, in default GOTO time.
Press GOTO.
Example 2: Exit to the cue immediately following the loop, in default GOTO time.
Press GOTO.

156
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Chases
Program chases by defining a QList as a chase in the Playback Properties dialog box. Panel keys are
available for on-the-fly rate and direction override. The chase designation and all chase settings are
saved with the QList. The QList's chase settings are always valid, no matter to which playback
device the QList is loaded.

Setting chases and chase properties

The Playback Properties dialog box Chase Option fields control chase settings.

Figure 52: The Playback Properties dialog box - Chase Properties

Chase Properties Options What it does Default

Chase Pattern Normal The chase is executed in sequential cue Yes

order.

Build Values for each cues are piled until reaching

the last cue. Then the first cues state is
restored and the chase starts [Link]
is taken into consideration unless it has been
turned off.

Bounce The chase runs from beginning to end and

then from the end to the beginning

Random Steps are executed in random order or in

random time or both, depending on the
settings for random time and rate.

157
Compulite
Chapter 7

Chase Properties Options What it does Default

Run Options Stop on last After completing the loops, the chase stops Yes
Note: Not available on the last cue and waits for a command.
when chase is an
infinite loop.

Release on last After completing the loops, the pb is

released from priority.

Stop on first After completing the loops, advance to the

first cue in the QList and stop.

Release on hold If the chase is running and STOP/BACK is

pressed, the chase gives up priority.
Note: The setting in Run Options
determines how the chase starts again

Chase Direction chase runs in ascending order (forward). Yes

 chase runs in descending order (backward)

Chase Type Pos(itive) The first cue’s values are off. The rest of the
cues are at their recorded valves. As the
chase progresses the first cue is turned on
and the values of the second cue go to 0.

Neg(itive) This type of chase is also known as a Yes

shadow chase.
Example: Shadow chase with four steps:
Step 1 - 2, 3, 4 are on.
Step 2 - 1, 3, 4 are on.
Step 3 - 1, 2, 4 are on.
Step 4 - 1, 2, 3 are on.
Random Type Step The chase rate remains the same, but the
step order is random.

Time The step order remains the same, but the Yes
rate, when fading from step to step, is
random.
Note: Step and Time can be used simultaneously

Use first cue as Applies the recorded cue time as the chase
chase-in time in time.
Loop Count Set the number of loops the chase makes.

158
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Chase Properties Options What it does Default

Chase Rate Set the chase rate 100%

Xfade Set the chase's crossfade properties. Note: 100%
0% bumps from step to step (hard chase).
Int Limit Set a proportional level for the fader. 255

The Go behavior is integral to chase playback. Define the Go behavior under the QList and Temp
Assignment Properties group.

Options What it does Default

GO Behavior Exit Loop Push Go and exit loop by fading to the next Yes
cue.

Exit Loop at End Loop completes and then automatically fades

to next cue.

Restart Loop chase jumps to first cue of the chase

Stop at Next Cue chase stops after it completes current cue.

Programming chases
Chases are QLists that are designated as chases. The chase designation and all chase settings are
saved with the QList when exiting the Playback Properties dialog box by tapping STORE; the QList
will always run as a chaser. Exiting the dialog box by tapping CLOSE does not save the Qlist as a
chaser.

Use loops for chases that occur within QLists using just some of the QList’s cues. See “Loops”
page 113

To designate a QList as a chase

1 Load the QList to a playback device.

2 Press SETUP
3 Press SELECT (where the QList is loaded). The Playback Properties dialog box opens.
4 Choose Chaser from the QList Mode drop down menu.
5 Tap STORE or CLOSE.

Controlling chase rate

Chase speed can be controlled on-the-fly or preset in the Playback Properties dialog box.

Pressing rate displays the rate options in the Editor toolbar:

CHASE RATE controls the overall speed of the chase; the rate at which it fades from step to
step.
XFADE controls the look of the chase; if it fades between the steps or jumps from step to step.

159
Compulite
Chapter 7

To control chase speed on-the-fly

1 Press the large RATE key.

2 Press SELECT for the pb device that is running the chase. The wheel assignments switch to
the rate bank.
3 Use chase rate wheel to adjust the chase speed.

Or
4 Change the fader function to rate faders by pressing on the RATE key.
5 Use the fader to control the chase rate.

To preset the chase rate

1 Press SETUP. The Playback Properties dialog box opens.

2 Set the chase rate field, using the arrows.
3 Press OK. The chase rate is saved as an attribute of the QList.

To change the chase look

1 Press the large RATE key.

2 Press SELECT for the pb device that is running the chase. The wheel assignments switch to
the rate bank.
3 Use xfade wheel to fade or jump the steps.

Snaps
A snap is a snapshot of the playback devices’ state. Vector stores up to 9999 snaps. Triggering a
snap loads playback devices with the contents of the snap. Snaps can be attached to cues and auto-
matically triggered when the fade to that cue begins.

Snaps include:
QLists, temporary cues, and fixtures loaded on each fader page, on QKeys, and on A/B.
Fader mode on each page.
Fader levels on each page.
Load (assignment) properties
Run mode
Priority values
Playback device setup as configured in the Playback Properties dialog box.

Playback devices can be excluded from the snap. You may want to exclude your master playback
(usually the A/B crossfader) from snaps. Excluding playback devices from snaps is available in the
Playback Properties dialog box. See “Playback Properties dialog box - Playback Definitions tab”
page 150.

160
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

Active snaps
There is always an active snap. The active snap’s number is displayed in the master playback’s
LCD display. Whenever you press SNAP, the active snap’s number is displayed in the command
line.

All objects loaded to empty faders are stored in the active snap.

To save run modes, rate changes, fader levels, and fader modes it is necessary to update the active
snap.

When opening a new show, snap 1 is automatically active. When you begin programming a new
show all temporary cues, QLists, and fixtures loaded on the faders are automatically stored as snap
1. When loading a show, snap 1 is automatically triggered.

Figure 53: Master playback LCD showing the active snap

Snap modes
Snaps work in three modes:
Forcing snap mode- All current loads are replaced by the snap.
Snap merge mode - The incoming snap loads all the relevant playback devices. PBDs that are
already loaded and that have no replacement in the incoming snap, are not freed from their
current load.
Snap add mode - current output on playback devices included in the snap are not replaced until
the pbd is inactive or the fader is at zero. Loads on playback devices that not overwritten by
the snap are not replaced when triggering the snap. This is not implemented yet.

Storing a new snap

To store snaps

1 Press STORE
2 Tap a number on the snap soft keys.

OR

161
Compulite
Chapter 7

1 Press STORE.
2 Press SNAP and enter a number on the numeric keypad.
3 Press ENTER.

Triggering snaps
To trigger snaps in forcing mode

Tap a snap in the snap key tab.

OR
Press SNAP, type the snap number on the numeric keypad, and press ENTER.

To trigger snaps in snap-add mode

Press and hold SHIFT and tap a soft key in the snap tab.

OR
1 Select a snap.
2 Press and hold SHIFT and press ENTER.

Using Snap Go

Using the SNAP GO key, located to the left of the faders’ flash keys, is a quick way to operate the
next or the previous snap. This key can be protected to ensure that it is not accidentally pressed.

To trigger snaps using Snap Go

Press SNAP GO to operate the next snap.

Press and hold SHIFT then press SNAP GO to operate the previous snap.

To trigger Snap Go

1 Go to the Tools menu and choose System Settings. The System Settings dialog box opens.
2 Go to the General tab.
3 Tap PROTECT SNAP GO.
4 Tap OK.

To operate protected SNAP GO

Automatically triggering snaps

Automate playback by attaching snaps to cues. Fading to cue automatically triggers the attached
snap. Automatic triggering can be disabled.

To attach a snap to a cue

1 Select the cue.

2 Select the snap.

162
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

3 Press ENTER.

To disable automatic triggering

Press SETUP and SELECT for the fader. Disable Trigger on the Assignment Properties tab.

OR
Press SHIFT+TRIGGER and SELECT for the fader.

Modifying snaps
Snaps remember only the initial assignment on each playback device.

Example: The active snap is snap 1. The first QList loaded is QList 2 to fader 10. This is what is
stored in the active snap. If you now free fader 10 and load QList 5, this is not stored in snap 1.
Triggering snap 1 reloads QList 2 to fader 10. To save the new load on fader 10, you must update
the snap.

Update the snap to save all changes in run mode, rate changes, and load changes.

To modify snaps

1 Make the modifications to the snap.

2 Press STORE.
3 Enter the snap number using the numeric keypad.
4 Press ENTER. The Store Options dialog box opens.
5 Tap OVERWRITE in the Store Options dialog box.

Naming snaps
To name snaps

1 Press TEXT.
2 Select the snap.
3 Press ENTER.
The Text dialog box opens.
4 Use the keyboard to type the snap’s name.
5 Press ENTER or tap OK.
The dialog box closes.

Deleting snaps
To delete snaps

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the snap (or snaps).

163
Compulite
Chapter 7

3 Press ENTER.
The Delete dialog box opens.
4 Press DELETE or ENTER again.

Or
Tap DELETE in the dialog box.

To delete a range of snaps

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the snaps: SNAP # #.
3 Press ENTER.
The Delete dialog box opens.
4 Press DELETE, tap OK, or press ENTER again.

Examining snaps
To view a list of snaps

Press EXAM, SNAP, ENTER.

OR
Toggle the snap soft keys to spreadsheet view by tapping . A list of snaps is displayed in
the active pane.

To examine a snap

Example: Examine snap 5.

1 Press EXAM.
The contents of the snap are displayed in the active pane.
2 Select snap 5.
3 Press ENTER.

OR
1 View the snaps in spreadsheet format. If necessary, toggle to spreadsheet view.
2 Double click on snap 5.
The contents of the snap are displayed in the active pane.

Copying snaps
To copy snaps

1 Select the source snap.

2 Press COPY.
The snap is copied to the clipboard.
3 Select the target snap.

164
 VECTOR
Playback Devices and QList Playback

4 Press PASTE.
The new snap is named Copy of Snap # (source snap).

165
Compulite
Chapter 7

166
Chapter 8 Saving, Loading, and Printing
Show Files
Drive D:\ contains Vector’s system files, show files, layout files, and visualizers.

This chapter contains the following sections:

Saving Shows (see page 167)
Loading shows (see page 168)
Printing shows (see page 170)

Saving Shows
Show files include all show data, patch, macros, and display layouts. the file extension for Vector
shows is *.cvs. We recommend creating a new folder to hold backup files for essential show files,
layout files, and customized device files.

Although you can save a show by repeatedly saving to the same file name, we recommend that you
use the Save As option, so you can always return to a previous version of the show if necessary.

IMPORTANT! Make it a habit to frequently save your work!

To save a show

1 Go to the File menu and choose Save. The Save dialog box opens.
2 Browse to the location where you save shows. Vector’s default location is: D:\Program
Files\Compulite Vector\Vector Shows.
3 Type the show name in the File Name field.
4 Tap SAVE.

OR
Press Ctrl + S on the keyboard.

To use Save As

Go to the File menu and choose Save As.

Autosave
Vector automatically saves your show every 10 minute, if there have been changes in the show data,
or after a certain number of modifications to the show.

167
Compulite
Chapter 8

The autosave files are under D\Program Files\Compulite Vector\Config\Autosave. Autosave files are
named: ShowName_###.cvs, where ### is incremented by one each time an autosave occurs. When
reaching 999 the counter is reset to 000. the last 10 files are retained in the Autosave subdirectory.

Loading shows
When loading shows through the Open Show option (File menu), all show data is loaded.

To open a show

1 Go to the File menu and choose Open Show. The Open dialog box opens.
2 Browse to where your saved shows are located. Vector’s default location is: D:\Program
Files\Compulite Vector\Vector Shows.
3 Choose a show from the list of your shows.
4 Tap OPEN.
A dynamic bar shows the load progress.
All patch information, settings, display layouts, and stored objects (cues, snaps, macros,
etc.) are loaded.

Loading specific objects and patch information

You can load selected objects or patch information from shows to Vector. This is useful, for
example, if you want to reuse the patch or libraries from a previous show.

The objects you can load are:

QLists - all or specific QLists
Libraries - all or specific libraries
Groups
Snaps
Macros

The patch information that can be loaded includes:

Devices
Sets
DMX address patch

Numbering imported objects is customizable. The Numbering Options group in the Import dialog
box allows you to:

168
 VECTOR
Saving, Loading, and Printing Show Files

Example: Your current show has QLists numbered from 1 to 5. You are importing QLists 4
through 6 from a previous show.

APPEND Start numbering imported objects from the next available number. As per
the example: The imported QList 4 becomes QList 6, imported QList 5
becomes QList 7, and imposed QList 6 becomes QList 8.

START FROM Specify the start number for the imported objects. As per the example:
Starting from 10, imported QList 4 becomes QList 10, imported QList 5
becomes QList 11, and imported QList 6 becomes QList 12.

KEEP ORIGINAL The original object numbers are preserved. If there are objects in the
current show with the same number, the imported object will not be
loaded. As per the example: Only QList 6 will be imported.

OVERWRITE The imported objects will overwrite the existing objects. As per the
example: imported QLists 4 and 5 overwrite the current QLists 4 and 5.

To load specific objects

1 Open the File menu.

2 Choose (tap) Import.
The Import Options dialog box opens.
3 Tap the object you want to load.
4 Select the numbering option.
5 If required, tap SELECT or DESELECT in the Select Range group, and select the range of
cues or libraries, etc.
6 Tap OK.

File conversion
You can now load Ovation 4D, Micron 4D, and Sabre show files to Vector. These files are automat-
ically converted to Vector format. File conversion is supported from OVD06R04, SPD06R04, and
SBRD06R03. The conversion is one sided. Once saved in vector format, the cannot be re-converted
to Sabre or 4D format.

Converted • QLists
• Memories (including loops, links, text, time in/out)
• Patch
• Configuration (Service Tools Configuration System)
• Libraries
• Groups
• Show Text.
• Fixtures
Note: Sabre and 4D console devices can be opened in the Device Builder via
the Patch Manager. You can change their profiles and save them as new devices
or you can replace them with Vector devices.

169
Compulite
Chapter 8

Not • Snaps
converted
• Macros
• Events

To load a 4D or Sabre show file

1 Go to the File menu and choose Open Show.

The Open dialog box opens.
2 Browse to the show’s location, select the file type, and the file. Sabre show files: C*.CUE.
4D show files: V*.CUE.
3 Tap OPEN.
The show opens.
4 Save the show in Vector format.

Printing shows
You may wish to print hard copy of your shows for archival purposes. Use the Workspace tree to
select the information you want to print.

To select items for printing

1 Open the File menu.

2 Choose Print Multiple.
The Print Multiple dialog box opens.
3 Open the Workspace.
4 Expand the Show node.
5 Tap the items you want to print.
To select more than one item press and hold Ctrl and click each item you want to select.
To select continuous items, click the first item then press and hold Shift and click the last
item.
6 Click or tap PRINT.

170
Chapter 9 Libraries
Libraries are a programmable database of preset parameter values.

This chapter includes the following sections:

About libraries (see page 171)
Working with libraries (see page 172)
Using library storage options (see page 177)
Editing libraries (see page 181)
Using libraries for programming cues (see page 182)

About libraries
The library database is used as building blocks when programming cues. Modifying a library
globally updates cues that reference that library. Libraries can be used for assigning base values
when programming effects.

You can store up to 9999 libraries of each library type. The numbering in this list is identical to the
numbering under the library node in the workspace.
1. Position - all parameters in the position bank.
2. Color - all parameters in the color bank.
3. Beam - all parameters in the beam bank.
4. Effects - all effect attributes.
5. Timing - all timing settings.
6. Intensity - all parameters in the intensity bank.
7. Image - all parameters in the image bank.
8. Shape - all parameters in the shape bank.
9. Palette - a non-tracking library
10. Tracking - a special tracking library that can include all parameters.

171
Compulite
Chapter 9

Working with libraries

Libraries are stored using console key sequences and the Editor toolbar in library mode or using
library type soft keys.

The workflow for storing libraries is:

1. Select fixtures and assign values.
2. Access library storage by pressing LIB on the console or LIBRARY on the toolbar.
3. Choose the library type and give the library a unique number.
4. Optional - select one of the storage options available on the toolbar.

Each library type appears in a numbered list in the workspace. Library types can be selected by
their list number. You can also use the parameter type keys to select most library types. Example:
press COLOR when storing a color library or press 2, which is color library in the numbered library
list.

Automatically generating libraries

Vector can automatically generate:
Color libraries
Intensity libraries
Image libraries
10

You can choose to generate some or all of these objects for some or all of the devices used in the
show.

Figure 54: Generate libraries and groups dialog box

You can number the libraries to your convenience in the dialog box’s numbering area. The
numbering option fields are:

172
 VECTOR
Libraries

Start From Store the first generated library or group to the number in this field and sequen-
tially increment the libraries or groups.

Align Choose an offset. Generally, it is convenient to chose an offset that corresponds

to your display set up.
Example: Assume that you have sized the soft keys pane to show 5 soft keys per
row. You choose to generate 5 groups for each fixture type. If the start number is
1 and the offset is 10, the generated groups will appear in every other row.

If there are existing libraries and groups you can choose to:
Leave them as is
Overwrite them
Update them

To open the Generate Groups and Libs dialog box

Open the Tools menu and tap Generate Groups and Libs.

OR
1 Press SET.
2 Tap the GENERATE GROUPS AND LIBRARIES button on the Editor toolbar.

Color and image libraries can be generated for one device or for multiple devices. When generating
these libraries for multiple devices, you must select a primary device. Vector generates the libraries
for multiple devices according to the primary device. Example: You want to generate color libraries
that will be common to three devices. The primary device has a color wheel and the other 2 devices
lack a color wheel, but have CMY color parameters. The libraries are generated according to the
primary device’s color wheel. For the other devices, Vector sets their CMY levels to match the
primary device’s color wheel.

You can also chose to generate separate libraries for each device.

IMPORTANT! To generate libraries the check box next to the library type must be
checked and the library type must be selected. When selected, the library type appears on
a light field.

To generate common color or image libraries for multiple devices

1 Open the Tool menu.

2 Choose (tap) Generate Groups and Libs.
The Generate Groups and Libs dialog box opens.
3 Expand Generate All.
4 Make sure Color or Image are checked.
5 Tap Color or Image to select.
The item appears on a light field.
6 Set the start number in the Start from fields and the offset in the Align field.

173
Compulite
Chapter 9

7 Select the primary device from the drop down dialog menu.
8 Make sure the devices are checked under the Generate for Devices list.
9 Select the behavior (Leave, Overwrite. or Update).
10 Tap APPLY or OK.
The libraries are generated according to the primary device.

To generate separate color or image libraries

1 Open the Tool menu.

2 Choose (tap) Generate Groups and Libs
The Generate Groups and Libs dialog box opens.
3 Expand Generate All.
4 Make sure Color or Image are checked.
5 Tap Color or Image to select.
The item appears on a light field.
6 Make sure the devices are checked under the Generate for Devices list.
7 Set the start number in the Start from fields and the offset in the Align field.
8 Tap SEPARATE LIBRARIES.
9 Select the behavior (Leave, Overwrite. or Update).
10 Tap APPLY or OK.
Libraries are generated for each device.

To generate intensity libraries

1 Open the Tool menu.

2 Choose (tap) Generate Groups and Libs.
The dialog box opens.
3 Expand Generate All.
4 Make sure Intensity is checked.
5 Make sure the devices are checked under the Generate for Devices list.
6 Set the start number in the Start from fields and the offset in the Align field.
7 Set the level increments in the% Step field.
8 Select the behavior (Leave, Overwrite. or Update).
9 Tap APPLY.

Storing libraries
To store a library

Example: Store color library 8.

1 Select the fixtures and set the color values.

174
 VECTOR
Libraries

2 Press ENTER. The values are output.

3 Press STORE.
4 Tap an available space on the color library soft keys.

OR
1 Select the fixtures and set the color values.
2 Press ENTER. The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press LIB.

Or
Tap LIBRARY on the Editor toolbar.
5 Press COLOR and 8.
6 Press ENTER.

Adding text tags to libraries

To add text tags to libraries

1 Press TEXT.
2 Select the library.
3 Press ENTER.
The Text dialog box opens.
4 Use the keyboard to type the library name.
5 Press ENTER or tap OK.
The dialog box closes.

OR
Immediately after storing the library, press TEXT and follow steps 4 and 5.

Deleting libraries
To delete libraries

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the library.
3 Press ENTER.
The Delete dialog box opens.
4 Press DELETE or ENTER again.

Or
Tap DELETE in the dialog box.

OR

175
Compulite
Chapter 9

1 Press DELETE.
2 Tap the library soft key.
3 Press ENTER.

Examining libraries
To view a list of libraries

Press EXAM, press a parameter key to select the library type, and press ENTER.

OR
Toggle the library soft keys, to spreadsheet view by tapping . A list of libraries is
displayed in the active pane.

To examine a library

Example: Examine position library 5.

Press EXAM, select the library, and press ENTER. The contents of the library are displayed in
the active pane.

OR
1 View the position libraries in spreadsheet format. If the position library tab is in soft key
format, toggle to spreadsheet format by pressing .
2 Double click on library 5.
The contents of the library are displayed in the active pane.

Copying libraries
To copy a library

Copy position library 1 to position library 4.

1 Select position library 1.
2 Press COPY or CUT.
Position library 1 is copied to the clipboard.
3 Select position library 4.
4 Press PASTE.
Position library 1 is copied to position library 4.
The text on the soft key for position library 4 is, Copy of 1.

176
 VECTOR
Libraries

Using library storage options

Tapping LIBRARY or pressing LIB sets the Editor toolbar to library mode. The library mode toolbar
provides buttons for expanded control over library storage.

Figure 55: Library mode in the Editor toolbar

Buttons What they do Default

FIXTURE This type of library can be applied only to the specific Depends on the
SPECIFIC fixtures programmed in the library. A value is set for library category.
each fixture in the library.

DEVICE This type of library can be applied to fixtures of the Depends on the
SPECIFIC same device type. library category
PATTERN This type of library is analogous to effects. Not selected
TRACKING The library is tracked for global cue modification. On
ALL FOR All parameters belonging to the same parameter type as On
SELECTED the active parameter are stored in the library.
BANK

INCLUDE TIME Time assignments for the selected parameter will be Off
included in the library.
INCLUDE Effects running on the selected parameter will be Off
EFFECT included in the library.
BANK FILTERS • On - include all parameters in the bank. On
• Off - include all active parameters regardless of their
wheel bank assignments.

ATTENTION! When storing a device specific library, make sure that all selected fixtures
are set to the correct values. Within device specific libraries Vector allows individual
fixtures to maintain a unique value. This is useful in cases where a fixture needs indi-
vidual correction, for instance when gobos have been switched in a fixture’s gobo wheel
and gobo 1 is in the gobo 2’s place.

177
Compulite
Chapter 9

Fixture and device specific libraries

Fixture libraries can be applied only to the specific fixtures programmed in the library. Device
libraries can be applied to all fixtures of the same device type.

The default library for parameter types are:

Fixture Specific Device Specific Sequential

Position Color Effect
Intensity Beam Timing
Tracking Image
Shape
Palette

Library modes are displayed in the library soft keys.

Device specific libraries are represented by a D.
Fixture specific libraries are represented by an F.
Pattern libraries are represented by a P.

To store fixture or device specific libraries

Example: Store a fixture specific color library.

1 Select the fixtures and set the color values.
2 Press ENTER.
The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Tap LIBRARY.

Or
Press LIB.
5 Press COLOR.
6 Tap FIXTURE SPECIFIC.
7 Tap a library number in the color library soft keys.

Or
Enter a number on the numeric keypad and press ENTER.

Library patterns
Library patterns are applied to fixtures sequentially as a repeating pattern.
Example: the library contains values for fixtures 1, 2, and 3. Apply to fixtures 1 thru 9.
The values for fixture 1are applied to fixture 1, 4, 7.
The values for fixture 2 are applied to 2, 5, 8.
The values for fixture 3 are applied to 3, 6, 9.

178
 VECTOR
Libraries

To store libraries using the pattern option

Example: Store a sequential color library.

1 Select the fixtures and set the color values.
2 Press ENTER.
The values are output.
3 Press STORE.
4 Tap LIBRARY.

Or
Press LIB.
5 Press COLOR.
6 Tap PATTERN.
7 Tap a library number in the color library soft keys.

Or
Enter a number on the numeric keypad and press ENTER.

Filtering libraries
There are two buttons that filter libraries:
ALL FOR SELECTED BANK

BANK FILTERS

All for selected bank option

Some parameters are not automatically included in libraries when they are not active in the editor.
Example: Position type parameters usually include pan and tilt, but certain devices might also have
move speed or move time. When storing a position type library, move speed is not automatically
included in the library.

What is automatically included in libraries?

Intensity bank Dimmer only

Position bank Pan, Tilt only

Color bank All parameters: color wheels, CMY, speed, time, func

Beam bank Focus, Zoom, Iris only

Image bank Only parameters that have been edited.

Shape bank All parameters: all blades, etc.

The ALL FOR SELECTED BANK option allows you to include all parameters, belonging to the
parameter bank, in the library.

179
Compulite
Chapter 9

To include all parameters

Example: You are storing an intensity library for a device that has a shutter. It is not active in
the editor, but you want it included in the library.
1 Select fixtures.
2 Set dimmer level.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press LIB.
5 Tap ALL FOR SELECTED BANK.
6 Store an intensity library.
The dimmer level and the shutter are stored in the library.

Bank filters option

In some cases, you might want to store parameters in libraries that do not normally accept such
parameters. Example: You might want to store pan and tilt in a color library, which normally allows
only parameters belonging to the color parameter type.

When BANK FILTER is disabled, any parameter can be stored in a library. The default is BANK
FILTER enabled and the button has an orange field.

To store an unfiltered library

Example: Store all parameters active in the editor in a color library.

1 Select the fixtures.
2 Set a dimmer level.
3 Adjust the pan and tilt.
4 Set color levels.
5 Press LIB.
6 Press COLOR.
7 Tap BANK FILTERS.
The button now has a blue background and library filtering according to parameter type is
cancelled.
8 Store to a color library.
The color library contains dimmer, pan, and tilt, as well as the color parameters.

To store some active parameters in a library

Example: Pan, tilt, dimmer, and color parameters are active in the editor. You want to store
pan, tilt, and color settings in a color library, but not the dimmer.
1 Select the fixtures.
2 Set a dimmer level.
3 Adjust the pan and tilt.
4 Set color levels.

180
 VECTOR
Libraries

5 Press POSITION.
The position wheel bank is now available.
6 Press the parameter keys to select pan and tilt.
Pan and tilt are now selected (they appear in red) in the editor.
7 Press LIB.
8 Press COLOR.
9 Tap BANK FILTERS.
The button now has a blue background and library filtering according to parameter type is
cancelled.
10 Store to a color library.
The color library contains pan, tilt, and the color parameters.

Editing libraries
Libraries can be modified directly or when updating cues. Using the Update dialog box options (see
page 98). Cues referencing a library are automatically updated when the library is modified.

To modify fixture values in a library

Example: Modify values for spot 2 in image library 1.

1 On the Editor toolbar, tap EDIT LIBRARY.
2 Select image library 1.
3 Press ENTER.
The library values are applied to the fixtures in the library.
4 Press 2 to select spot 2 and adjust the values.
5 Press ENTER.
The new values are applied to the selected spot.
6 Press UPDATE.
7 Press ENTER.
Image library 1 is updated.

To add fixtures to a library

Example: Add spots 3 and 4 to image library 1.

1 On the Editor toolbar, tap EDIT LIBRARY.
2 Select image library 1.
3 Select spots 3 and 4 and set values.
4 Press ENTER.
The values are applied to the selected fixtures.

181
Compulite
Chapter 9

5 Press UPDATE.
6 Press ENTER.
Image library 1 is updated.

To remove fixtures or parameters from a library

Example: Remove spots 3 and 4 from image library 1.

1 On the Editor toolbar, tap EDIT LIBRARY.
2 Select image library 1.
3 Press ENTER.
The values are applied to the selected fixtures.
4 Press RELEASE.
5 Select spots 3 and 4.
6 Press ENTER.
7 Press UPDATE.
8 Press ENTER.
Image library 1 is updated.

Note: Adding and releasing fixtures from libraries can be applied to a range of libraries.

Using libraries for programming cues

Using libraries to build lighting looks makes cue editing easier, quicker, and more accurate.

Use of position libraries is particularly important since updating libraries globally updates the cues
programmed with libraries. If your show moves to a new venue, updating your position libraries
ensures that the positions in cues will be on the mark.

Library soft keys are color coded. When you select fixtures, the library soft keys’ color code shows
the applicability of the library to the selection.

Color What it means

Orange The library matches all the fixtures in the selection.

Light orange The library matches some of the fixtures in the selection.

Gray There is no match between the library and the fixtures in the selection.

Blue • There is no selection; the system is in idle after pressing SHIFT + RESET.
There is no such library.

To program a cue using libraries

Example: Program a cue using position library 5.

1 Select the fixtures.

182
 VECTOR
Libraries

2 Tap 5 on the position library soft keys.

The pan and tilt values are set according to the values stored in the library.
The library icon is displayed in the pan and tilt cells.
3 Store the cue.

OR
1 Select the fixtures.
2 Press LIB.
3 Press POSITION and enter 5 on the numeric keypad.
4 Press ENTER.
The pan and tilt values are set according to the values stored in the library.
The library icon is displayed in the pan and tilt cells.
5 Store the cue.

183
Compulite
Chapter 9

184
Chapter 10 Macros
Macros are collections of commands. Triggering a macro activates the commands stored in the
macro. an example of a possible macro is: FREE, SELECT (for PB 2), QLIST, 5, SELECT (for PB
2), GO.

Macros are triggered manually, by selecting and operating the macro, or automatically by attaching
a macro to a cue. Macros that are attached to cues operate when the cues sequence on a playback
device.

There are dedicated console keys for quick access to macros 101 through 106. You can also set soft
keys for macros.

When storing macros, remember that macros are a collection of keystrokes. Any manual fader is
not recognized and therefore not stored in macros. Wheel values are recognized, however they are
treated as absolute values and the fixture jumps to values stored in macro.

You can store up to 9999 Macros.

This chapter includes the following sections:

Working with macros (see page 185)
Triggering macros (see page 187)

Working with macros

Storing macros
The most efficient method for storing macros is using macro soft keys. Be sure to create a soft key
tab for macros before storing macros.

To store macros

Example: Store macro 10 that activates snap 5.

1 Press SHIFT + MACRO or press MACRO and tap teach MACRO.
(M) now precedes the command line default mode.
2 Press SNAP and 5. Then press ENTER. The key presses are collected in the command line.
3 Press SHIFT + MACRO. (END) now precedes the collected keypresses displayed in the
command line.
4 Press STORE and tap macro soft key 10.

Or
Press STORE, select the macro number on the numeric keypad, and press ENTER.

185
Compulite
Chapter 10

Adding text tags to macros

To add text tags to macros

1 Press TEXT.
2 Select the macro by tapping its soft key.
The Text dialog box opens.

Or
Tap MACRO , enter the macro number on the keypad and press ENTER.
The Text dialog box opens.
3 Type the text and tap OK or press ENTER.

Deleting macros
To delete macros

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the macro.
Or
Select more than one macro: MACRO # #

3 Press ENTER.
The Delete dialog box opens.
4 Press DELETE again or tap DELETE in the dialog box.

Examining macros
To view a list of macros

Toggle the macro soft keys, to spreadsheet view by tapping . A list of macros is displayed
in the active pane.

To examine a macro

Example: Exam macro 10.

To examine a macro

Example: Exam macro 10.

1 Press EXAM.
2 Select macro 10.
3 Press ENTER.
The contents of the macro are displayed in the active pane or in the default exam pane.

OR
1 View the macros in spreadsheet format. (If the macro tab is in soft key format, toggle to
spreadsheet format.)

186
 VECTOR
Macros

2 Double click on macro 10.

The contents of the macro are displayed in the active pane.

Copying macros
To copy macros

Example: Copy the contents of macro 1 to macro 6.

1 Press MACRO and enter 1 (the source macro number) on the numeric keypad.
2 Press COPY. The macro is copied to the clipboard.
3 Press MACRO and enter 6 (the target macro number) on the numeric keypad.
4 Press PASTE. The new macro is named Copy of Macro 1.

Triggering macros
Trigger macros manually or by attaching them to cues. Macros that are attached to cues are auto-
matically triggered when the cue sequences on a playback device.

There are six dedicated macro keys for macros 101 - 106.

To operate macros manually

Go to the macro soft key tab and tab the macro.

OR
1 Press MACRO and enter the macro number on the numeric keypad.
2 Press ENTER.

Automatically trigger macros

Automate playback by attaching macros to cues. Fading to cue automatically triggers the attached
macro. Automatic triggering can be disable for specified playback devices.

To attach a macro to a cue

1 Select the cue.

2 Press macro and select the macro number on the numeric keypad.
3 Press ENTER.

To disable automatic triggering

Press SETUP and SELECT for the fader. Disable Trigger on the Assignment Properties tab.

OR
Press SHIFT+AUTO and SELECT for the fader.

187
Compulite
Chapter 10

Triggering macros using MIDI

Vector’s macros can be triggered by an external MIDI device using the program change command.
The macro number is entered as the velocity value.

To trigger a macro with MIDI

Example: Trigger macro 10.

Set the note to 0 and the velocity value to 10.

188
Chapter 11 Topo
Topo is an on-board utility that allows you to construct a topographical map of your rig.

This chapter contains the following sections:

Working with topo (see page 189)
Manipulating the topo view (see page 193)
Printing the topo map (see page 194)

Working with topo

To construct a topo map, you must be in topo view. The basic topo view is a top view of a stage.
Superimposed on the stage is a grid to aid accurate fixture placement. Also shown is one high-
lighted vertical and one horizontal line that divide the stage into up left, down left, up right and
down light with center stage clearly marked. The stage dimensions can be modified.

In topo view you can:

Set pipes and other hanging elements.
Place and rotate fixtures in their hanging positions.
Set placeholders to represent stage elements, such as tables, chairs, pianos, risers, etc.
Select fixtures for editing. See “Selecting fixtures via the topo map” page 66

To open a topo view

1 Go to the patch manager: Tools Patch Manager.

2 Make sure the workspace is in navigation mode. and select Topo View.

Setting stage dimensions

Stage dimensions are set in the System Settings dialog box. They can be set before entering topo
mode or while in topo mode.

The stage dimensions are displayed in the topo map’s lower right corner. The default dimensions
are: 1800 cm. x 1200 cm. The maximum stage size is: 8000 cm. x 5000 cm.

To change the stage dimensions

1 Tap Settings in the Tools menu. The System Settings dialog box opens.

Or
Tap Settings in the Topo menu. The System Settings dialog box opens
2 Open the Topo tab.

189
Compulite
Chapter 11

3 Type the new dimensions in the fields.

4 Tap OK.

Note: If the view does not refresh and display the new stage dimensions, close the topo
view and reopen it.

The topo toolbar

You can show or hide the topo toolbar. All the toolbar icons are also available in the topo menu.

To show the topo toolbar

On the menu bar, tap Topo Topo toolbar

Topo grid
Topo view has a grid overlay. The grid points are set 50 centimetres (half a meter) apart. You can
show or hide the grid.

To show/hide grid

Tap .

Placing stage elements and fixtures

Stage elements are basically pipes and other hanging positions. These elements can be resized and
used as placeholders for risers and other objects. Stage elements and fixtures can be rotated.

Stage fixtures are selected from the New Stage Fixture dialog box.

Figure 56: New stage fixture dialog box

A range of fixtures can be selected. Each fixture set is represented by a different generic icon.

190
 VECTOR
Topo

Channel set:

Spot set:

Notes: When building the topo map, you may find it easier to work with a mouse or the trackball
in mouse mode.

To place stage elements

1 Open the drop down element list by tapping the arrow on .

2 Tap Stage Fixture from the drop down list. An element is added on the topo view. It
appears at center stage (on the horizontal line).
3 Select the element, by clicking on it, and drag it to its correct position.
4 Size the element by clicking to select it and drag it by one of its lower corners:
Or
Right click on the selected element, choose Properties and set the size in the Topo Element
dialog box.

To rotate stage elements

1 Select the element by clicking on it.

2 Right click and select Rotate from the fly out menu. The pointer changes to the rotate icon.
3 Drag the rotate icon in the direction you want to rotate the element.
4 When the element is positioned, exit rotate by clicking the left mouse button.

To resize stage elements

1 Select the element by clicking on it.

2 Right click and select Properties from the fly out menu. The Topo Element dialog box
opens.
3 Type size values in the Width and Height fields.
4 Tap OK.

To place fixtures

1 Open the drop down element list by tapping the arrow on . Select Stage Fixture.
The New Stage Fixture dialog box opens.
2 Enter the fixture information in the fields.
3 Tap INSERT. The new fixture is inserted at the top left corner of the stage.

191
Compulite
Chapter 11

4 Drag and drop the fixture or set an absolute location in the Stage Fixture Properties dialog
box.

To rotate fixtures

1 Select the fixture by clicking on it.

Or
Select a group of fixtures by pressing and holding the right mouse button and dragging a
rectangle around the group of fixtures.
2 Right click and select Rotate from the fly out menu. The pointer changes to the rotate icon.
3 Drag the rotate icon in the direction you want to rotate the element.
4 When the element is positioned, exit rotate by clicking the left mouse button.

Modifying fixture properties

The Stage Fixture Properties dialog box can be used to change the location of the fixture on the topo
map and record additional information pertaining to the fixture.

Figure 57: Stage Fixtures Properties dialog box

Group Fields What is it Edit

General

Set The fixture set. This field cannot be edited.

Fixture The fixture number. This field cannot be edited

Name The fixture’s name This field cannot be edited

Properties

Address

192
 VECTOR
Topo

Group Fields What is it Edit

X Location The fixture on the x axis. 0:0 is the map’s upper left corner
(upstage right)

Y Location The location on y axis. Enter a new location.

Gel name Free text field. Type a gel name or number

Note Free text field. Type useful information.

Angle The angle is shown in Enter an absolute value. The reference

degrees is the original angle.

To modify fixture properties

1 Right click on a fixture and, from the fly out menu, choose Properties. The Stage Fixture
Properties dialog box opens.

2 Navigate to the relevant field and type the new information.

3 Click UPDATE. The dialog box closes and the new information is stored.

Deleting fixtures or elements

To remove a fixture or element

1 Select a fixture, a range of fixtures, or an element

2 Tap . The Delete Items dialog box opens.
3 Tap OK to confirm or CANCEL to escape.

Manipulating the topo view

You can:
Zoom in
Zoom out
Fit the stage to the screen
Slide the view with the hand tool
Scroll the view

To zoom the view

Tap the zoom icon on the topo toolbar. The cursor morphs into the icon. Click or tap on the
view.

To exit the zoom tool

Tap the icon again. The cursor returns to being a pointer.

193
Compulite
Chapter 11

To scroll the view

Use the mouse scroll wheel or Vector’s vertical wheel with SCROLL WIN enabled.

Printing the topo map

The topo map prints on a white background while fixture icons, stage elements, and grid dots are in
black. When printed the text box under a fixture shows its DMX address.

To print the topo map

1 Open the File menu.

2 Tap PRINT. The Print dialog opens.
3 If necessary, set up print.
4 Tap OK.

194
Chapter 12 Effects
This chapter includes the following sections:
About effects (see page 195)
Storing effects (see page 198)
Movement attributes (see page 199)
Time attributes (see page 206)
Releasing effects from cues or from the editor (see page 211)

About effects
Effects are continuously running fades of parameter values, spread among a number of fixtures.
Effects on the pan and tilt parameters can be used, for example, to create circles and figure 8s.
Effects running on color parameters can be used to create a rainbow effect. The use of effects is as
unlimited as your imagination.

Effects editor
Effects are programmed and edited in the Effect Editor dialog box. When the Effect Editor is open,
the parameter wheels are set to the effect wheel bank. Offset, size, rate, and duty cycle attributes
can be set using the wheels or the fields in the Effect Editor. Base values for the selected parameter
are controlled with the wheel labelled [Link] vertical wheel controls the dimmer intensity. The
trackball controls pan and tilt.

Effects can be programmed for all fixture types and all parameters. Effects can be played back on
all playback devices and in the editor.

The default position for the effect editor dialog box is aligned left, so the Offset, Size, Rate, and
Duty attributes appear above their control wheels.

Note: Vector remembers the dialog box’s last position, therefore if it was moved it will
not be aligned with the wheels next time it opens.

Prebuilt effects

Vector is supplied with prebuilt effects. All attributes of prebuilt effects can be modified. You can
also build your effects from scratch using the primitives and attributes that appear on the Effect
Editor ’s Basic tab.

195
Compulite
Chapter 12

Figure 58: Pre-built effects in the Effect Editor dialog box

To use prebuilt effects

1 Select fixtures.
2 Press EFFECT. The Effect Editor dialog box opens. The wheel assignments jump to the
effect wheel bank.
3 Tap the Pre-built tab. Choose an effect.
The effect immediately begins running.
4 If necessary, adjust the effect using the wheels. See “Attributes” page 196
5 Store the effect as a cue or store it as an effect library.

Effect attributes

Figure 59: Basic tab in the Effect Editor dialog box

Attributes

Primitive Primitives are the effect’s basic movement pattern.

Swing Swing settings determine the value range of the effect.
Wave Functions Wave Automatically fan offset attribute
Single Automatically fan offset attribute and set the
duty cycle’s Total attribute.
Normal Cancel the wave function and reset all
attributes that were automatically changed.

196
 VECTOR
Effects

Attributes

Rate Direction Switch effect direction

Neg(ative)

Pos(itive)

Pattern Type Build

Not implemented Center
yet.
Normal

Random

Neg

Pos

Loop Count Set the number of times the effect repeats.

Fixture Grouping Not implemented yet. Divide the selection into groups.
Offset Controls the point at which a parameter begins its action within the time
cycle.
All Set the same off set for the selection.
Fan Fans the offset on the fixture selection.
Size Determines direction and scope of the effect in relation to the base value.
All Set the same size for the selection.
Fan Spread the size relatively over participating
parameters.
Rate Sets the number of seconds it takes to complete one effect cycle.
All Sets the same effect rate for all participatingpa-
rameters.
Fan Fans the rate on the fixture selection.
Duty Cycle Determines how many times the effect occurs within one time cycle.
On How many times effect repeats
Total Time cycle

Primitives

Primitives are the effect’s basic movement pattern. Combining primitives is a quick way to create
effects. Example: Create a circle by assigning (primitive) sine to pan and (primitive) cosine to tilt.
primitives are available in the Basic and Advanced tabs.

197
Compulite
Chapter 12

Figure 60: Primitives in the Basic tab

Figure 61: Primitives in the Advanced tab

Fan and selection order

The order in which fixtures are selected determines the order in which fan settings are executed.
Example: If the spot selection was 1 12, spot 1 is the first spot to respond, spot 2 is the next, etc.
If the spot selection was 12 1, spot 12 is the first spot to respond, spot 11 is the next, etc. This is
also true for non-sequential spot selections.

To program an effect

1 Select fixtures and parameters.

2 Press EFFECT.
The Effect Editor dialog box opens. The wheel assignments jump to the effect wheel bank.
3 Choose a primitive. The effect immediately begins running.
4 Adjust the effect using the fields in the Effect Editor or the wheels.
5 Store the effect as a cue or store it as an effect library.

Storing effects
Once an effect is working to your satisfaction, you can store it as a cue or as an effect library.

The default for effect libraries is sequential libraries. An effect library is never specific to a device.
It can be applied to all fixtures and is not limited to the fixtures that were active when the effect
library was stored.

Effect libraries are applied as patterns. Example: when stored the effect was running 3 spots. Apply
it to 9 spots and it runs as 1, 2, 3, 1, 2, 3,1, 2, 3. Of course, when storing the effect library this
default can be changed. Using library storage options (see page 177)

Note: Choosing INCLUDE BASE, when storing effect libraries, causes base values in
effect libraries to override the parameter values in the editor.

To store an effect in a cue

The procedure is the same as storing any cue. Storing cues (see page 90)

To store an effect library

1 Designate a soft key set for effect libraries.

198
 VECTOR
Effects

2 Press STORE.
3 Tap a number in the effect library soft keys.

Movement attributes
Effects’ movement attributes are:
Primitive
Base
Swing
Size

Primitives
Primitives are the effect’s basic movement pattern. Vector comes with five primitives. Different
primitives can be assigned to each parameter. Combining primitives is a quick way to create
complex effects.

Figure 62: Primitives in the Effect editor, Basic tab

Figure 63: Primitives in the Effect editor, Advanced tab

A primitive can be assigned at any point during effect programming. You may find that you want to
adjust the base, assign offset, and rate values before assigning the primitive.

Most primitives operate from 0% - full and back to 0%. This can be manipulated by changing the
size attribute.

To assign a primitive

1 Select fixtures and set base values.

2 Press EFFECT.
3 Tap a primitive that appears in the Basic tab. The effect is immediately applied.

199
Compulite
Chapter 12

Primitive schematics

Sine primitive
Sine starts at 50%. it runs from 50% to full to 0% and back to 50%. This characteristic causes the
effect to rest at 50% when the duty cycle is something other than 1:1 Use sine together with cosine
to program a circle effect.

Cosine primitive

200
 VECTOR
Effects

Step primitive

Ramp up primitive

Ramp down primitive

201
Compulite
Chapter 12

Base
Base is the parameter value that defines the effect’s starting point. Base values are parameter and
spot specific. Set the base value prior to accessing the Effect Editor. Use the base wheel to change
base values. Change dimmer (intensity) values using the vertical wheel.

To modify base values

Select the fixtures and the parameter. Use the base wheel to change the parameter value.

Tip! Use libraries to set base values.

Swing
Swing determines the direction and scope of the effect in relation to the base value, the starting
point. Swing can be Up, Center, or Down.

Figure 64: Swing options in the effect editor

Up swing

Center swing

202
 VECTOR
Effects

Down swing

Swing examples

Example 1
Base 30
Size 50%
Swing Up

The effect runs from the base (30) to 60 and to 90.

Example 2
Base 30
Size 50%
Swing Down

The effect runs from the base (60) to 30 and to 0

Example 3
Primitive - Sine
Base 70
Size 50%

203
Compulite
Chapter 12

Swing Center

The effect runs from the base (70) to FL (100%) to 20.

Note: The top of the effect is actually 120. The effect stays at 100% for the length of
time it takes to run from 100% to the virtual values (above 100%).

Size
Size determines how much movement takes place from the effect’s starting point (the base). Size is
a percentage. The size range is from 0% to 100%. The size default is zr or 50 or FL depending on
the type of parameter.

204
 VECTOR
Effects

Example: The base is 60, size is 60, swing is center. The range of movement is base +30 and base -
30.

Example: The base is 30, size is 60, swing is center. The range of movement is base +30 and base -
30. The parameter value limits are 60 at the top of the effect and 0 (zero) at the bottom of the effect.

To change the size

1 Select the fixtures and the parameter.

2 Press EFFECT to open the Effect Editor.
3 If necessary, tap ALL in the Size group.
4 Use the size wheel to set the value.

Or
Enter an absolute value on the numeric keypad.

To apply (size) fan

1 Select the fixtures and the parameter.

2 Press EFFECT to open the Effect Editor.
3 Tap FAN in the Size group.
4 Use the size wheel to set the fan value.

Or
Enter an absolute value on the numeric keypad.

205
Compulite
Chapter 12

Fanning parameters
The FAN PARAMETERS option fans the effect over parameters. This allows control over the
parameters in a single spot.

To fan parameters

Example: Apply a fan effect to cyan, magenta, and yellow in spot 1.

1 Select spot 1.
2 Select cyan, magenta, and yellow.
3 Press EFFECT.
The Effect Editor dialog box opens.
4 Select a primitive from the Pre-built, Basic, or Advanced tabs.
5 Go to the Advanced tab.
6 Tap FAN PARAM.
The Offset, Size, and Rate attributes can now be set for fanning parameters.
7 Adjust the Offset, Size, and Rate attributes as required.

Time attributes
The time attributes are:
Rate
Offset
Duty Cycle

Rate
Rate is how many seconds it takes to complete an effect cycle. Example: A rate setting of 4 seconds
means that the entire effect cycle is completed in 4 seconds.

Rates can be positive or negative. A negative rate causes the effect to switch directions. Example: A
circle effect assigned a rate of 10 seconds runs clockwise. A circle effect assigned a rate of -10
seconds runs counter clockwise.

To change the rate

1 Select the fixtures and the parameter.

2 Press EFFECT to open the Effect Editor.
3 Tap ALL in the Rate group.
4 Use the rate wheel to set the rate value.

Or
Enter an absolute value on the numeric keypad.

206
 VECTOR
Effects

To fan the rate

1 Select the fixtures and the parameter.

2 Press EFFECT to open the Effect Editor.
3 Tap FAN in the Rate group.
4 Use the rate wheel to set the fan value.

Or
Enter an absolute value on the numeric keypad.

Offset
The offset controls when a parameter begins its action within the time cycle. Offset has two
settings: All and Fan. Offset All assigns an absolute offset value to the selected fixtures. Offset Fan
spreads the offset over the selected fixtures.

To set an absolute offset

1 Select the fixtures and the parameter.

2 Press EFFECT to open the Effect Editor.
3 Tap ALL in the Offset group.
4 Use the rate wheel to set the offset.

Or
Enter an absolute value on the numeric keypad.

To set fan offset

1 Select the fixtures and the parameter.

2 Press EFFECT to open the Effect Editor.
3 Tap FAN in the Offset group.
4 Use the rate wheel to set the fan offset.

Or
Enter an absolute value on the numeric keypad.

Fixture grouping
Fixture grouping with offset determines how the offset is spread among the devices.
Example: An intensity step effect is running on spots 1 through 10. All 10 spots turn on and off at
the same time. Set the fixture grouping to 2 and tap WAVE. Now the odd spots are on when the even
spots are off and vice versa.

Examples of Offset uses

Example: program an effect for channels where groups of channels are on or off at the same time in
a step effect. The channels are divided like this:
Group 1 - channels 1, 11, 21

207
Compulite
Chapter 12

Group 2 - channels 2, 12, 22

Group 3 - channels 3, 13, 23
Group 4 - channels 4, 14, 24

Use Offset All and assign:

Offset 0 to group 1
Offset 25 to group 2
Offset 50 to group 3
Offset 75 to group 4

Example: Offset All and Offset Fan can be used together. Changing offset values using All does not
change the relative fan. Channels 1 through 4 have been set to fan values:

Channels Offset using Fan After adding 5% using All

Channel 1 0 5

Channel 2 25 30

Channel 3 50 55

Channel 4 75 80

Duty Cycle
The duty cycle determines how many times, within one time cycle, a parameter executes its effect.
Duty cycle settings also allow some fixtures to run while other fixtures are resting.

The duty cycle is represented by two numbers- On and Total. The first number (On), the numerator,
is the number of repeats within the time cycle. The second number (Total), the denominator, is the
division of allotted time. The duty cycle default is 1:1.

The value for On may not exceed the value for Total.

Duty cycle schematics

Example: This effect is running 3 fixtures.

Duty Cycle: 1/3
No offset

208
 VECTOR
Effects

Example: This effect is running 3 fixtures.

Duty Cycle: 1/3
Offset: 0 / 33 / 66

Some examples of duty cycles:

209
Compulite
Chapter 12

Duty Cycle Rate What happens

1:1 6 seconds Parameters complete 1 effect cycle within the allotted time period
(6 seconds).

1:2 6 seconds Parameters complete 1 effect cycle in half the allotted time (3
seconds). During the remainder of the time cycle (3 seconds) they
rest.

2:2 6 seconds Parameters complete 2 effect cycles within the allotted time
period.

2:4 6 seconds Parameters complete the effect cycle twice in half the allotted time
(2 complete effects in 3 seconds). During the remainder of the time
(3 seconds) they rest.

1:3 6 seconds Parameters complete 1 effect cycle in 1/3 the allotted time (2
seconds). During the remainder of the time cycle (4 seconds), they
rest.

3:6 6 seconds Parameters complete the effect cycle 3 times in half the allotted
time (3 seconds). During the remainder of the cycle (3 seconds),
they rest.

To change the duty cycle

1 In the Duty Cycle group, tap Total.

2 Use the duty cycle wheel to set the time division.
3 In the Duty Cycle group, tap Total.
4 Use the duty cycle wheel to set the time division.
5 In the Duty Cycle group, tap On.
6 Use the duty cycle wheel to set the number of repeats.

Synchronizing effects
You can synchronize effects running on different parameters. Attributes that are synchronized are:
Offset
Rate
Duty cycle

To synchronize effects

Example: The effect running on cyan is ramp up and wave. The effect running on magenta is
ramp up. Synchronize the effects on cyan and magenta.
1 Select fixtures, select cyan and set a base level
2 Press EFFECT.
3 Choose RAMP UP and WAVE.
4 Select magenta and set a base level.

210
 VECTOR
Effects

5 Choose RAMP UP.

6 Go to the Advanced tab in the Effects dialogue box and tap SYNC WITH.
7 Select cyan.
8 Tap CLOSE.
Now the cyan and magenta effects are starting and finishing at the same time.

Releasing effects from cues or from the editor

You can release effect assignments from all the parameters, from selected parameters, or from
parameter types.

To release effects from cues

1 Press RELEASE.
2 Press EFFECT.
3 Select cue.
4 Press ENTER.

OR
1 Tap EDIT CUE.
2 Chose the cue.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Press RELEASE.
5 Select the fixtures.
6 Optional - select the parameters. If no parameters are selected, then all parameters are
released from the effect.
7 Press EFFECT. The effect editor opens.
8 Press ENTER.

To release effects from fixtures in the editor

1 Press RELEASE.
2 Select the fixtures.
3 Optional - select parameters. If no parameters are selected, all parameters are released.
4 Press EFFECT. The effect editor opens.
5 Press ENTER. The selected parameters are released from the effect. The effects editor
closes.

To release effects from all fixtures in the editor

1 Press RELEASE.
2 Press EFFECT. The effect editor opens.

211
Compulite
Chapter 12

3 Press ENTER. Effects are released from all parameters. The effects editor closes.

To release effects from parameter types

Example: Release effects from all color parameters.

1 Press RELEASE.
2 Select the fixtures.
3 Press COLOR.
4 Press EFFECT.
5 Press ENTER. Effects are freed from all color parameters.

Note: This sequence is valid for all parameter types.

212
Chapter 13 Advanced Editing and
Programming Features
This chapter contains the following sections:
Pre-positioning parameters with Look Ahead (see page 213)
Using Highlight (see page 214)
Using Rem Dim (see page 217)
Using Sneak (see page 218)
Dark parameter positioning (see page 219)
Using Matrix (see page 224)
Parameter Fade Profiles (see page 228)

Pre-positioning parameters with Look Ahead

The Look Ahead feature is used for automatic pre-positioning of selected parameters when the
fixture’s dimmer is dark, thus avoiding visible parameter movement. To use Look Ahead, the
fixtures’ dimmer must be at zr.

Look Ahead fades can be set for a specified default time, which is different than the cues’ default
fade time.

Before using Look Ahead, you must create a Look Ahead mask. The Look Ahead mask tells Vector
which spots, spot parameters, or scrollers are affected by the Look Ahead feature.

Note: To temporarily disable Look Ahead, set the dimmer to at least 1%.

Working with Look Ahead

To enable or disable Look Ahead

Go to Tools Settings Behavior and tap LOOK AHEAD ACTIVE.

To change the default Look Ahead fade time

Go to Tools Settings Timing and set the time in the Default Look Ahead Time field.

To override the default Look Ahead fade time

Set unique fade times for the parameters participating in Look Ahead.

To program the Look Ahead mask

1 Press STORE.

213
Compulite
Chapter 13

2 Select spots.
3 Select parameters.
4 Tap . on the Editing toolbar.
5 Press ENTER.

To delete the Look Ahead mask

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select fixtures.
3 Select parameters.
4 Tap . on the Editing toolbar.
5 Press ENTER.

To examine the Look Ahead mask

1 Press EXAM.
2 Tap LOOK AHEAD MASK on the Editor toolbar.
3 Press ENTER.

Using Highlight
The highlight feature is used as an aid to identifying fixtures that are active on stage, verifying pan
and tilt orientation, or verifying address assignments. Highlight can also be used as a quick method
of updating libraries.

Highlight can be used with all varieties of fixture selections. NEXT and PREVIOUS are used to
cycle through the fixtures. When reaching the end of the fixture selection, highlight loops back to
the first fixture in the selection.

Note: Highlight cycles through selections in the same order that the fixtures were
selected.

When highlight is active the key’s LED is on. Highlight remains active until cancelled.

Apply Highlight to What happens

Channel • Dimmer to FL or to the value set in the highlight palette.

Fixture with scroller • Dimmer to FL

• Scroller to home or to the value set in the highlight palette

Spot • Dimmer to full

• All parameters (except pan and tilt) to home or to the value set in the
highlight palette.
• Pan and tilt are not affected.

214
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

To apply highlight

1 Select a fixture, or a range of fixtures, or a group.

2 Press HIGHLIGHT.
3 Press NEXT or PREVIOUS to move to the next or previous fixture.

OR
1 Press HIGHLIGHT.
2 Select a fixture, or a range of fixtures, or a group.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Press NEXT or PREVIOUS to move to the next or previous fixture.

Using lowlight
Lowlight is highlight in solo mode. In this mode, the intensity of the selected fixtures goes to 30%
and the highlighted fixture’s intensity goes to full. Use this mode when there are active fixtures with
level assignments.

When lowlight is active the key’s LED blinks.

Apply lowlight to What happens

Channel • Highlighted fixture @ FL.

• Other fixtures @ 30% or to the value set in the lowlight palette

Fixture with scroller • Highlighted fixture at FL. Other fixtures to 30% or to the value set in
the lowlight palette.
• Scroller to home

Spot • Highlighted fixture at FL. Other fixtures to 30% or to the value set in
the lowlight palette.
• All parameters for the selected spot only go to home or to the value
set in the lowlight palette.
• Pan and tilt are not affected.

To apply lowlight (highlight solo mode)

1 Select a fixture or a range of fixtures.

2 Press SHIFT + HIGHLIGHT.
3 Press NEXT or PREVIOUS to move to the next or previous fixture.

OR
1 Press SHIFT + HIGHLIGHT.
2 Select a fixture, or a range of fixtures, or a group.
3 Press ENTER.
4 Press NEXT or PREVIOUS to move to the next or previous fixture.

215
Compulite
Chapter 13

To exit highlight

Press HIGHLIGHT, or CLEAR, or RELEASE, or RESET.

Using highlight and lowlight palettes

You can store palettes to use with the highlight or lowlight features. They apply the palette values
instead of the fixture’s home values. Pan and tilt are not included in the highlight and lowlight
palettes.

You can store only one highlight and one lowlight palette.

Note: Highlight and lowlight palettes are device specific.

To store highlight or lowlight palettes

Example: Create a highlight palette where the color settings are: cyan @ zr, magenta @ zr, and
yellow @ FL and dimmer is FL.
1 Select fixture. Set dimmer to full and set color parameter levels.
2 Press ENTER.
3 Press STORE.
4 Press LIB.
5 Press HIGHLIGHT.

Or
Press SHIFT + HIGHLIGHT to store a lowlight palette.
6 Press ENTER. The highlight or lowlight palette is stored.

To delete the highlight or lowlight palette

1 Press DELETE.
2 Press LIB.
3 Press HIGHLIGHT or LOWLIGHT.
4 Press DELETE again or press ENTER or tap OK.

To exam the highlight or lowlight palette

1 Press LIB
2 Press EXAM. the active pane shows a list of libraries.
3 In the Library Name column, double click on Highlight or Lowlight.
4 The highlight (or lowlight) parameter values are displayed.

216
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

Using highlight to update libraries

Highlight can be used for quick updating of fixture specific libraries. This procedure can be used to
update all libraries, including position libraries.

Before beginning this procedure, press SHIFT + RESET to clear the editor entirely and make sure
that there is no active selection. If there is an active selection the library will be applied to the
selection.

To update a library

Example: update position library 3.

1 Press LIB.
2 Press POSITION and 3 on the numeric keypad.

Or
POSITION 3 on the position soft keys tab
3 Press HIGHLIGHT. The first fixture in the library has its dimmer turned on FL.
4 Adjust the pan and tilt values using the trackball or the wheels or enter an absolute value.
5 Press NEXT. The next fixture’s dimmer is turned on.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 as needed.
7 Press STORE or UPDATE. The library is stored with the new values. The highlight feature
is now inactive.

Using Rem Dim

Another way to isolate a fixture for easy identification, is by using rem dim. This feature keeps the
selected fixture or fixtures at stage value, while forcing all other fixtures to zero.

Since this is an editor function all parameters and wheels are available for fixture editing while
REM DIM is active. You can also apply a library to the REM DIM selection. You can store new cues
using REM DIM.

Exiting REM DIM releases all unchanged values to playback device control. Parameter and dimmer
values that were modified while REM DIM was active are retained in the editor.

To blackout all fixtures except the selected fixture

1 Select the fixture(s).

2 Tap REM DIM on the Editor toolbar.
Only the selected fixture’s dimmer remains on. All other fixtures are entered to the editor
and forced to zr.
3 Tap REM DIM to exit.

To locate a fixture

1 Select a fixture to start from.

217
Compulite
Chapter 13

2 Optional - set a dimmer level.

3 Tap REM DIM on the Editor toolbar.
Only the selected fixture’s dimmer remains on. All other fixtures are entered to the editor
and forced to zr.
4 Press NEXT or PREVIOUS to advance.
The active fixture is on at the specified level or, if no level was specified in step 2, at its
original level.
5 Tap REM DIM to exit and return the dimmer levels to all fixtures.

Note: NEXT and PREVIOUS cannot be used if a range of fixtures has been selected.

To store a cue using REM DIM

Example: The next to last lighting look has back light, a cyclorama color wash, and a special
comprised of three fixtures. You want to quickly isolate the three fixture special and store only
the special as last cue.
1 Select the three fixtures.
2 Set an intensity level.
3 Press REM DIM.
The back light and color wash are forced to zero.
4 Store a new cue.

Note: All zero intensity values are stored in the new cue.

Using Sneak
Sneak fades parameter levels to their previous level or to zr in the default sneak time.

Sneak times can also be changed on the fly. Also, specific parameter levels may be selected to over-
ride the [Link] can change the default sneak time in: Tools Settings Timing.

To sneak a parameter.

1 Select the fixtures.

2 If the selection is a moving device, select the parameter using the wheel bank keys or tap
the parameter name in the Wheel Assignments.
3 Press SNEAK.
4 Press ENTER. The parameter level fades to its previous level or to zr.

To sneak a parameter with selected time

1 Select the fixtures.

2 If the selection is a moving device, select the parameter using the wheel bank keys or tap
the parameter name in the Wheel Assignments.

218
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

3 Press TIME and enter a number on the numeric keypad.

4 Press SNEAK. The parameter level fades to its previous level or to zr in the selected time.
5 Press ENTER.

Dark parameter positioning

There a three functions that allow you to preset parameter values when the fixture’s dimmer is
dark, thus avoiding visible parameter movement:
LookAhead
Mark Cue
Force Black

To pre-position parameters when the dimmer is dark, you must insert a cue that brings dimmer
levels to zero.

LookAhead
The LookAhead feature is used for automatic pre-positioning of selected parameters when the
fixture’s dimmer is dark, thus avoiding visible parameter movement. For LookAhead to work, the
fixtures’ dimmer must be at zr and there must be parameter moves from one cue to the next cue.

LookAhead fades can be set for a specified default time, which is different than the cues’ default
fade time.

Before using LookAhead, you must create a LookAhead mask. The LookAhead mask tells Vector
which spots, spot parameters, or scrollers are affected by the LookAhead feature. If you have not
specified parameters in the Look Ahead mask, all parameters will be affected. The Look Ahead
mask can contain more than one parameter.

Note: If you want to temporarily prevent Look Ahead, give the dimmers a value of 1%.

Working with LookAhead

To enable or disable LookAhead

Go to Tools Settings Behavior and tap LookAhead Active.

To change the default LookAhead fade time

Go to Tools Settings Timing and set the time in the Default LookAhead Time field.

To override the default LookAhead fade time

Set unique fade times for the parameters participating in LookAhead. See “Fade times”
page 110

219
Compulite
Chapter 13

To delete the LookAhead mask

To program the LookAhead mask

1 Press STORE.
2 Select spots.
3 Optional - select parameters.
4 Tap . on the Editing toolbar.
5 Press ENTER.

To delete the LookAhead mask

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select fixtures.
3 Optional - Select parameters.
4 Tap . on the Editing toolbar.
5 Press ENTER.

Mark cues
Mark cues look ahead to the next cue in the QList and pre-position all parameters except the
dimmer, under the condition that the dimmers for the fixtures included in the mark cue are at zr
intensity in the cue before the mark cue. If the dimmers are not at zr, in the cue before the mark cue,
the move is ignored. The cue before the mark cue is automatically set as a follow on cue to provide
a seamless fade to the mark cue.

When you a store a mark cue, it adopts the time settings from the cue before. Example: Cue 2 has a
wait time of 4. Insert a mark cue, cue 2.5, between cues 2 and 3. Cue 2 automatically becomes a
follow on cue for a seamless fade to the mark cue. The mark cue, cue 2.5, is also a follow on cue
and adopts cue 2’s wait time of 4.

When you update the cue after the mark cue, with new parameter values, the mark cue is updated as
well.

ATTENTION! Do not edit the mark cue. If you want to add parameters to the dark posi-
tioning, edit the cue after the mark cue. Mark cues should only contain the dimmer at
zero.

To create a mark cue

1 Press STORE.
2 Select a cue.
3 Tap on the Editing toolbar.
4 Press ENTER.

220
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

Force Black cues

Force Black cues are another way of positioning parameters in the dark. As it name implies, Force
Black cues quickly force the dimmer to zero, then immediately moves the parameter levels, and
finally follows on to the next cue, returning the dimmer to its stored level.

Example - Channel 1 is a scroller channel and its dimmer is on in cues 2 and 3.

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 FL 1

3 FL 11 The move to the new scroller setting is visible.

In this example, you program cue 3 as Force Black to move from scroller frame 1 to 11 in the dark.
Vector automatically inserts a cue between cues 2 and 3. The inserted cue number is the closest
available number. In our example, the Force Black cue is inserted before cue 3 and is numbered
2.99.

The inserted cue runs inherits one third of the fade time for, in our example, cue 3. This is then
divided in half. Half of the time is used to fade the dimmer to zero. The remaining half moves the
parameters.

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 FL 1

2.99 The dimmer fades quickly to zero.

Then the scroller moves to frame 11.
There is an automatic follow on to cue 3.

3 FL 11 The dimmer fades up in cue time.

ATTENTION! If the dimmer comes back on before the parameter move is complete, give
the inserted cue a longer fade time. Example: if the inserted cue has inherited a 6 second
fade time, make the time of the inserted cue, in our example this is cue 2.99, longer.

To store a Force Black cue

1 Edit and store the cue.

2 Press STORE.
3 Select the cue.
4 Tap on the Editing toolbar.
5 Press ENTER.

To manually set Force Black time

1 Press STORE.
2 Select the cue.

221
Compulite
Chapter 13

3 Tap FORCE BLACK CUE on the Editing toolbar.

4 Press TIME and enter time in #/#/# format, where the first time setting is dimmer fade to zr,
the second tome setting is delay-in time to allow parameter moves, and the third time
setting is dimmer up time.
5 Press ENTER.

To convert a Force Black cue to a normal cue

1 Press DELETE.
2 Select the cue.
3 Tap FORCE BLACK CUE on the Editing toolbar.
4 Press ENTER.

Pre-positioning examples
Example 1: Channel 1 is a scroller channel and its dimmer is dark in cue 2.

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 ZR unknown

3 FL 11 Scroller frame may change on the fade to cue 2.

Table 1: Using LookAhead

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 ZR unknown When the fade to cue 2 is complete, the scroller automati-

cally fades to frame 11.

3 FL 11 The scroller is ready on frame 11 when the fade to cue 3

begins.

Table 2: Using Mark Cue

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 ZR unknown

2.5 ZR 11 When the fade to cue 2.5 is complete and the dimmer is at
mark zr, the scroller moves to frame 11.
cue

3 FL 11 The scroller is ready on frame 11 when the fade to cue 3

begins

222
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

Example 2 - Channel 1 is a scroller channel and its dimmer is on in cues 2 and 3.

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 FL unknown

3 FL 11 The move to the new scroller setting is visible.

Table 1: Using LookAhead

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 FL 1

2.1 ZR 1 When the fade to cue 2.1 is complete, the scroller automat-
ically moves to frame 11.

3 FL 11 The scroller is ready on frame 11 when the fade to cue 3

begins.

Table 2: Using Mark Cue - this will not give the desired result

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 FL 1

2.5 ZR 11 The frame moves and the dimmer fades at the same time,
so the move is visible.
Note: Mark cues should only contain the dimmer parameter
at zero.

3 FL 11 The scroller is on frame 11 when the fade to cue 3 begins

Table 3: Using Force Black cue - this is the solution

Cue Dimmer Scroller What happens during fades

2 FL 1

2.99 ZR 11 The scroller waits and begins its move only after dimmer
(Force has finished fading to zr.
Black) Note: Cues following Force Black cues are automatically
follow on cues.

3 FL 11 The scroller is ready on frame 11 when the fade to cue 3

begins.

223
Compulite
Chapter 13

Using Matrix
Vector’s interactive matrix programmer lets you program cues for RGB or CMY devices in a matrix
format, a truss wall rigged with conventional channels or other devices, or any configuration where
the fixtures are rigged in a matrix format.

Vector’s matrix feature supports.*gif, *.ico (icon), *.bmp, and *.jpeg files including animated
graphic files.

The workflow for setting up and programming using the matrix feature is:

Where What to do

Patch Manager Define matrixes and create matrix lists.

Map patched fixtures to the matrix cells.

Live editor Select fixtures and assign values.
Or
Load picture files.

Store the matrix lighting states as a cue.

Playback QLists.

Note: Matrix capacity is limited to up to 2,500 RGB or CMY devices (7,500 DMX
channels, 16 DMX universes).

Setting up matrixes

Creating new matrixes

Creating a matrix means defining the number of cells (rows and columns) and mapping patched
fixtures to the cells. Matrixes are created in the Patch Manager. Matrix definitions are subnodes
under the Matrix List node.

The size of the matrix is set in the Matrix Data dialog box.

Figure 65: Matrix Data dialog box

224
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

To create a matrix

1 Open the Patch Manager.

2 Make sure the Workspace is in navigation mode. (Tap N).
3 In the Workspace, tap Matrix List.
4 On the Patch Manager toolbar, tap . The Matrix Data dialog box opens.
5 Fill in the fields in the Matrix Data dialog box.
6 Tap OK. The matrix’s name appears in the Matrix List.

To map fixtures to the matrix

1 Select the matrix from the Matrix List.

2 Tap S to switch to selection mode.
3 Choose fixtures from Matrix in the Sets node. If there are no fixtures in the matrix set,
choose fixtures from Channels or Spots in the Sets node.
4 Drag fixtures from Matrix (or Channels or Spots) and drop them in the matrix cells. Repeat
until the matric mapping is complete.

Note: You can select a range of fixtures, by holding down SHIFT and clicking on the
first and last fixtures in the range. Then drag the entire selection and drop it in the first
cell of the range. The selection will arrange itself 1:1.

5 Exit the Patch Manager. Don’t forget to save the changes.

To clear fixtures

1 Display the matrix.

2 Select the fixtures by tapping on them in the matrix grid.
3 Tap . The Delete Items warning is displayed.
4 Tap YES to continue and delete the fixtures. Tap NO to cancel.

To delete a matrix

Select the matrix in the Matrix List node and tap .

Matrixes using conventional channels

When using convention channels with color filters in a matrix format, you may want to set the color
properties for the channels. The advantage of setting the color properties is that when programming
cues using the matrix, the correct color will be displayed. If the color property is not set, the channel
is shown in white on the matrix.

225
Compulite
Chapter 13

Figure 66: Matrix Fixture Properties dialog box

To set color properties

1 Select the fixture in the matrix grid.

2 Tap . The Matrix Fixture Properties dialog box opens.
3 Choose a color from the drop down color list.
4 Tap OK.

Programming cues using the matrix

Once the matrix is set up and fixtures are mapped in the Patch Manager, you can program cues that
use the matrix. Cues that are based on the matrix are programmed as usual and, of course, are orga-
nized in QLists. Playback these QLists as usual.

Vector uses a special display for programming cues using the matrix

Figure 67: The matrix programmer display

To show the matrix programmer

1 Activate a pane.

226
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

2 Open the workspace and expand the Live node and the Matrix subnode.
3 Tap one of the matrix setups. The selected matrix is displayed.
4 Optional - toggle show/hide the matrix grid lines by tapping SHOW GRID.

To program cues using fixtures

1 Select fixtures. Tapping a cell in the matrix grid, selects the fixture mapped to that cell.
Tapping on multiple cells selects all the fixtures mapped to that cell.

Or
Select fixtures using the usual methods.
2 Assign values. The active values are displayed in the matrix grid.

Figure 68: The C represents the active fixtures and their parameter values
3 Save the lighting state as a cue using the usual methods for saving cues in QLists.
4 Continue programming cues as necessary.

To program cues using bitmaps

Vector supports most picture formats and animated graphic files.

Figure 69: Matrix programmer with imported bitmap

1 Display the matrix programmer.
2 Tap LOAD IMAGE. The Open dialog box opens.
3 Browse to your image, select it, and tap OPEN. The image is displayed. The usable portion
is delineated by a blue rectangle. The area within the rectangle is displayed in the matrix
grid. Fixture selection and setting the parameter values are automatic.
4 If necessary, change the portion of the image output in the matrix. Move the rectangle to
surrounding used portion by dragging it (the cursor is a hand tool) to a different location.
The editor automatically resets the fixtures and the parameter values.

227
Compulite
Chapter 13

5 Store as a cue in a QList.

To program cues using animated graphics

1 Display the matrix programmer.

2 Tap LOAD IMAGE. The Open dialog box opens.
3 Browse to the animation and double click to open. The first animation frame is displayed.
4 Store as a cue in a QList.
5 Advance to the next frame and store as a cue. Continue until you have stored each frame as
a cue. You can skip or repeat frames.

Animated graphic frame display and navigation buttons.

Parameter Fade Profiles

Profiles determine a parameter’s behavior during a fade. Profiles always relate to the fade time set
for the cue.

Profile What happens on the fade

Linear On go, the parameter fades in cue time to its new levels.

Jump on start On go, the parameter jumps to its new levels.

Jump on end When the fade is complete, the parameter jumps to its new levels.

Jump on 50% When the fade reaches 50% of the cue time, the parameter jumps to its new
levels.

Profiles can be applied to an entire parameter bank.

View profiles on the live spot and channel displays.

228
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

To set a fade profile

1 Select fixtures and set parameter levels.

2 Tap profile.
The Editor toolbar is now in profile mode.
3 Tap a profile.
4 Repeat as required before storing the cue.

To set bank profile

1 Select spots.
2 Select the bank by pressing one of the bank keys (INTENS, POS, COLOR, BEAM, IMAGE,
SHAPE).
3 Tap PROFILE.
4 Choose one of the profile options.
5 Press UPDATE, if editing a cue, or store a new cue.
6 Press ENTER.

To view profiles

1 Make sure the live spot or channel display is active.

2 Open the Format menu.
3 Tap Profile.
The profile appears in place of the parameter level.

229
Compulite
Chapter 13

230
 VECTOR
Advanced Editing and Programming Features

231
Compulite
Chapter 13

232
Chapter 14 Advanced Setup Features
This chapter contains the following sections:
System settings (see page 233)

System settings
The settings in the System Settings dialog box control much of the Vector’s default behavior.

Customized settings are saved with the show. Opening a new show resets the fields in the Settings
dialog box to the default settings.

To open the system settings dialog box

1 Go to Tools menu Settings

General

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

Save Settings as Default Save your customized settings as the

default setting. Each time you open a
new show, these settings are valid.

Load Default Settings not implemented yet.

233
Compulite
Chapter 14

Behavior

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

Operation Compulite mode • The editor does not clear after

mode storing a cue.
See page 9 • All parameter values for the
active fixtures are stored in each
cue

Tracking • The editor clears after storing a

cue.
• Only changed values (hard
moves) are stored in the cue. All
other values are tracked.
Syntax Action syntax Each keypress is immediately acted
See page 11 upon.

Enter syntax Pressing ENTER completes a

sequence.
Default stage Use default home values After reset, parameter levels return
values to home. Home values are set in the
See page 80 device definition.

Maintain last value After RESET, the last parameter On

value is retained.
ON Function Default value spin box Sets the level for ON key. 50

234
 VECTOR
Advanced Setup Features

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

1st on recalls last value • On - pressing ON, fades levels to Off

last value stored for the selected
fixtures. Press ON again, levels go
to default ON value.
• Off - pressing ON fades levels to
the ON default value.
Default store Drop down list Determines what is stored in each All
option cue: editor
See page 93 • All editor (red and white)
• Active only (red)
• All stage

All params if active • On -

• Off -

All params for selected • On -

• Off -
Other default Value input method • European - enter 1 digit for levels Amer-
behavior (example: 6 for 60%, 5.5 for ican
55%).
• American - enter 2 digits for lev-
els (example: 60 for 60%)

Next store incremented by Sets the increment when storing cues 1

using: STORE+ or
CUE, NEXT, STORE

Cue only • On - Changes to a cue are stored

Tracking mode only! as cue only and do not affect the
tracking.
See page 108
• Off - Changes to a cue are tracked
through the cues.

Automatically assign to • On - Stored cues are automati- On

playback cally loaded to the master
playback.
• Off - Stored cues are not automat-
ically loaded to the master
playback.

Ordered Playback Priority • On - playback devices are set in a Off

rigid priority hierarchy.
• Off - pbd priority is LTP.

235
Compulite
Chapter 14

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

GO as GOTO with cue • On - GO key executes out of On

time sequence fades.
See page 140 • Off - GO key does not execute out
of sequence fades.

Dip X-fade • On - Dip crossfade mode active.

• Off - Dipless crossfade mode
active.

On Snap - released pb to • On - On triggering a snap, QList

top always loads the first cue.
• Off - On triggering a snap, the
QList loads at whatever cue was
active when the snap was stores.

Grand Master • On - GM controls output levels On

from the console.
• Off - All output is at Full and the
GM level does not affect the
output.

Sneak active • On - Sneak active. During editing, On

absolute values fade in default
sneak time.
• Off - During editing, absolute val-
ues bump in.

Look ahead active • On - Look Ahead enabled.

• Off - Look Ahead disabled.

Automatic parameter • On - all parameters belonging to

grouping the same type are active in the
editor as soon as a level is set for
one of the parameters.
• Off - only the selected parameter
is active in the editor, isolated
from the other parameters belong-
ing to the same parameter type.

Temp Cues • On - allow temporary cues.

• Off - create a new QList and its
first cue with the levels in the
editor.

236
 VECTOR
Advanced Setup Features

Timing

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

System Time Speed at which levels fade in or out 1

in the editor.

Default cue time The default time-in/time-out for 2

cues.

Default back time The default time for back fades. 1

Default GOTO time The default time used by GOTO. 1

Default release time Speed at which released parameters 1

fade out when released from the
editor or from a playback device.

Default library time Speed at which library levels fade in 1

or out in the editor.

Default sneak time Speed at which levels fade in when 1

using the sneak feature.

Default LookAhead time

To change default times

1 Open the Tools menu.

2 Tap Settings.
The System Settings dialog box opens.
3 Go to the Timing tab.
4 Enter time values in the default time fields.
5 Tap OK to save and exit.

237
Compulite
Chapter 14

Hardware

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

System monitors 3 (Red)

2 (Blue)

Motorized faders Not implemented yet.

Playback wings in show Set the number of playback wings. 2 (Red)

1 (Blue)

Display settings Opens the Display Properties dialog

box.
In Display Properties set:
• Number of monitors
• Screen resolution
• Desktop wallpaper
• Other standard display settings

To improve display perfor-

mance

1 Right click on monitor 1.

2 Choose Primary.
3 Tap OK.

238
 VECTOR
Advanced Setup Features

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

Network settings Opens the Network Settings dialog

box.

Touch Screen Calibration Allows calibrating the touch screens.

To calibrate the touch screens

1 Open the System Settings

dialog box through the Tools
menu.
2 Tap the Hardware tab.
3 Tap Touch Screen
Calibration.
4 Tap the center of the x that
appears in the upper left
corner of the display.
5 Tap the center of the x that
appears in the lower right
corner of the display.

Touch Screen Settings Opens the Pointer Device Properties

dialog box.

Communication

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

Network ID The Network ID number appears in

this field.

Console ID The console ID number appears in

this field.

239
Compulite
Chapter 14

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

Master/Slave Slave When enabled the console works as

See page 249 a slave console.

Master Console ID Identify the master console.

DMX / DMX-on- VC’s Enabled Enable / disable virtual channel tran- On
Ethernet mission.

VC Compression Enabled Enable/disable VC compression On

Art-Net Enabled Connect with Art-Net devices

See page 253

Art-Net Subnet Set the Art-Net offset.

DMX Input Enabled

See page 252

Max Transmission Rate Regulate the rate at which DMX

(Hz) over Ethernet is transmitted. The
available range is 25 - 40 Hz.
MIDI MIDI Enabled Enable/disable MIDI (over ethernet) On
See page 260

MIDI Keys Enabled Enable/disable reception of MIDI

keys from an outside source_.

MIDI Macro Enabled Enabled storing MIDI macros on the

console.

MIDI Channel Set the MIDI channel

MIDI Code Offset Not implemented yet.

MSC Enabled Enable/disable MSC (over ethernet) On

MSC Device ID Set the MSC device ID

MSC Group ID Set the MSC group ID

MSC Peer’s ID Set the MSC ID

240
 VECTOR
Advanced Setup Features

Topo

Group Fields/buttons What it does Default

Stage Width Enter stage dimensions. the unit of 1800 cm

measurement is centimetres.
Stage Depth 1200 cm

241
Compulite
Chapter 14

242
Chapter 15 Multimedia Features
You can attach picture, *.avi or *.txt files to Vector show objects such as cues, libraries, groups,
snaps, and macros. You can also capture frames from a video transmission and attach them to show
objects.

This chapter contains the following sections:

File attachments (see page 243)
Multi-media Server integration - Hippotizer (see page 247)

File attachments
IMPORTANT! Windows Media Player 9 must be installed on your Vector in order to
use the attachment feature.

Attaching media and text files to show objects can be a great aid in providing accurate documenta-
tion for rep companies or keeping light crew shifts up to speed. Each show object supports two
attachments; one media file attachment and one text file attachment.

The attachment feature options - Attach, Note and Delete Attachment are available in the attach-
ment viewers and the Attachment menu.

Note: When using the Attachment menu, make sure the attachment viewer is the active
pane.

Attachment viewers
Attached files are viewed in the attachment viewers.

There are two attachment viewers:

One viewer is connected to the master playback device and its’ title bar is Playback Master
Attachment.

The second attachment viewer is for show objects that are selected in spreadsheets or soft keys and
its’ title bar is labelled Editor Tools Attachment Viewer. The Editor Tools viewer displays the
selected show object in the title bar. The master playback viewer displays the current cue in the title
bar.

243
Compulite
Chapter 15

Figure 70: Attachment viewer

Both attachment viewers have three controls
:

Control Use

ATTACH Attach a media file or text file to an object.

NOTE Toggle between text and graphic attachments.
Type a note in the attachment viewer area.
DELETE Delete attached media file or text.

Working with attachments

To display the master playback attachment viewer

Open the Workspace, then tap Playback Master Attachment.

To view an attachment viewer

1 Activate a pane.
2 Open the Workspace and expand Editor Tools and choose Attachment Viewer to attach or
view files attached to show objects.

To attach a media or *.txt file to the current cue (on the master playback)

1 Tap ATTACH in the Master Playback Attachment Viewer. The Open dialog box is
displayed.

Or
Go to the Attachment menu and tap Add Attachment.
2 Browse to the correct location and select your media file.
3 Tap Open. The file is attached to the current cue and is displayed in the Attachment Viewer.

To attach free text to the current cue (on the master playback)

1 Tap NOTE in the Master Playback Attachment Viewer.

The Open dialog box is displayed.

Or
Go to the Attachment menu and tap Note.

244
 VECTOR
Multimedia Features

2 Type text in the Attachment Viewer.

To attach a media or *.txt file to an object

Example: Attach a media file QList 1 cue 1.

1 Select the cue in either soft key or spreadsheet display.
2 Tap ATTACH in the Attachment Viewer.
The Open dialog box is displayed.

Or
Go to the Attachment menu and tap Add Attachment.
3 Browse to the correct location and select your media file.
4 Tap Open.
The file is attached to the selected object and is displayed in the Attachment Viewer.

To attach free text to an object

Example: Attach a text file to macro 2.

1 Select the macro in either soft key or spreadsheet format.
2 Tap NOTE in the Attachment Viewer.

Or
Go to the Attachment menu and tap Note.
3 Type text in the Attachment Viewer.

To delete an attachment

1 Select the object in either soft key or spreadsheet format and tap cue 1 to select it. Skip this
step if the cue is currently output.
2 Tap DELETE in the Attachment Viewer or Attachment menu.
You are asked to confirm the delete command.

To toggle the viewer between text and graphics

Tap NOTE.

Receiving video transmission

IMPORTANT!
Support for a USB camera requires updating the Windows
OS image. Please contact Compulite’s support team prior to
installing any USB camera driver.

245
Compulite
Chapter 15

Vector can receive and display video transmissions from a web cam connected at Vector’s USB port
or from digital cameras that are part of the general network and have an IP address. Frames can be
captured and attached to show objects and to cues on the master playback.

DirectX9 must be installed in order to use a web cam connected on Vector’s USB port.
If you are using cameras connected to Vector’s USB ports, you must connect the camera before
starting up Vector.

The Camera Viewer displays the input from the video source. The Camera Viewer has two controls:
ATTACH and MASTER PB.

Camera viewer controls

ATTACH Press to attach the displayed image to the selected object or to the
cue output on the master playback.
MASTER PB Toggle between the master playback cue and the selected object.

To display the camera viewer

1 Open the Workspace and expand the Editor Tools node.

2 Choose Camera Viewer.
The transmission is visible in the active display pane.

To connect to a camera

1 Make sure the camera viewer is displayed.

2 Open the Attachment menu.
3 Choose Select Video Source.
The Video Devices dialog box opens.
4 Tap USB to establish communication with a camera connected to Vector’s USB port.
5 Choose a camera from the device list.
6 Tap OK.

OR
1 Open the Attachment menu.
2 Choose Select Video Source.
The Video Devices dialog box opens.
3 Tap IP (ETHERNET), to connect to a camera that is available on the general network.
4 Enter the camera’s IP address or URL.
5 Tap OK.

To capture and attach a video frame

Example 1: Attach a video frame to a cue on the master playback.

1 Make sure the Camera Viewer is open: Workspace Editor Tools Camera Viewer.
2 Make sure Master PB is enabled in the Camera Viewer.

246
 VECTOR
Multimedia Features

3 Tapping ATTACH in the Camera Viewer attaches the current frame to the cue that is output
on the master playback device.
Example 2: Attach a video frame to position library 1.
1 Make sure the Camera Viewer is open: Workspace Editor Tools Camera Viewer.
2 Select position library 1 by tapping its soft key or choose the library from the list in spread-
sheet format.
3 Make sure Master PB is disabled in the Camera Viewer.
4 Tapping ATTACH in the Camera Viewer attaches the current frame to the library.

Multi-media Server integration - Hippotizer

Vector now supports media files preview for Hippotizer devices. Hippotizer banks and clips can be
selected through the Media Files picker.

Figure 71: Hippotizer dialog box showing available banks

Figure 72: Hippotizer dialog box showing available clips for the selected bank
Hippotizer device ID numbers, as defined in the Device Builder, are between 3600 and 3699.

You can create up to 8 layer fixtures.

The live spot display has dedicated fields for Hippotizer devices.

247
Compulite
Chapter 15

Figure 73: Live spot display with Hippotizer values

IMPORTANT! The Hippotizer IP address must have the same Network ID as Vector.
Example: if the Vector IP is 90.10.12, then the Hippotizer must be set to [Link]
number.

To connect with Hippotizer devices.

1 Open the Patch Manager.

2 Import the [Link] and the [Link] device files.
3 Create and patch Hippotizer devices. Make sure that the layer fixture names are identical to
the Hippotizer’s computer [Link]: If the Hippotizer is Hippov2-00123, the fixture
layers must be named Hippov2-00123_1, Hippov2-00123_2, etc.
4 Save and exit the Patch Manager.

To select banks and clips

1 Select the Hippotizer fixtures.

2 Double tapping the BANK parameter opens the Media Files dialog box.
The Hippotizer banks are displayed, showing a thumbnail for the first clip in the bank.
3 Select the bank.
4 Double tap the CLIP parameter.
Thumbnails of the clips are displayed.
5 Select the clip.
6 Click CLOSE.

248
Appendix 1 Backups and Peripherals
This chapter contains the following sections:
Master and slave consoles (see page 249)
Remote panels (see page 251)
DMX Input (see page 252)
Art-Net (see page 253)

Master and slave consoles

The master/slave feature enables connecting 2 Vector lighting consoles in a master/slave configura-
tion. In slave mode, the console does not transmit VC's. In case of master console failure, or loss of
connection, the slave takes over after 10 seconds.

The master and slave consoles are automatically synchronized and the show running on the master
console is automatically loaded to the slave console.

When connected, the slave console automatically receives all the data changes that occur on the
master console:
The slave console receives changes in data as they occur. Data includes new, deleted, and
changed objects, such as cues, snaps, groups, libraries, etc. Editor levels are also transmitted to
the slave console.
Playbacks are synchronized periodically, provided that a significant change, such as a new
assignment or a fade to a cue, has occurred.
File operations, such as Open Show or New Show, on the master are transferred automatically
to the slave. When opening a show on the master console, the show does not have to actually
exist on the slave's hard disk. The data is transferred from the master, not read from the slave's
hard disk.

Note: A PC/Laptop running version 3.06 (at least) of the off-line editor, can be
connected as the slave.

Status display
Master and slave status is displayed in the command line. The status indications show whether the
console is a master or a slave and to which console it is connected. If the connection is lost or
cannot be established, the indications do not appear.
The master console shows: Master: Connected to # (slave console’s ID number).
The slave console shows: Slave: Connected to # (master console’s ID number).

249
Compulite
Appendix 1

Connecting the consoles

The Master/Slave connection is over the Ethernet network.

To connect the consoles

Connect the control ports, located on the back panel of each console, using a crossed-linked
Ethernet cable. (Recommended)

OR
Use a 10/100 Ethernet switching hub. Connect both consoles to the hub using standard
Ethernet cables.

Configuring the slave console

After the consoles are physically connected, configure the slave console.

Figure 74: Master/Slave configuration

To configure the slave console

1 Go to the Tools menu and tap Settings. Open the Communication tab.
2 Tap Slave.
3 Set the ID of the master console. The master console's ID can be found on the master
console, Tools Settings Communication.
4 Tap OK. The slave connects to the master. A successful connection is displayed in the
slave’s command line: Slave: Connected to # (master console’s ID number).

To return the slave console to normal operation mode

Tools Settings Communication and then disable SLAVE.

Rules governing master/slave switchover

The rules governing master/slave switchover in the case of master console failure are:
If the master fails, the slave takes over in 100 milliseconds.
When the master is restarted, it is automatically set as the slave console. All data from the
current master console (formerly the slave console) is loaded to the new slave console.
If the connection to the master is restored in less than 10 seconds after failure, it is re-estab-
lished as the master console.

250
 VECTOR
Backups and Peripherals

Remote panels
Vector supports remote panels on two common platforms:
Pocket PC
PC/laptop

Vector and the remote panels work interlaced.

Use Vector’s remote panel applications for editing functions.

Setting up the network

Setting up the Vector network consists of:
Setting the IP addresses for the console and the remote panel.
Establishing the network connection

Vector’s IP address is defined as:

Network ID - 2 bytes define the general network, to which Vector is connected.
Console ID - 1 byte defines the console’s unique identifier.
Component ID - a 1 byte identifier for network components within the console. The realtime
component ID is 10. The Windows component is 1. This is factory configured and cannot be
changed.

The remote panel’s IP address is defined as:

Network ID - Same as the target console.
Any number - 0 - 254
Any number - 1 - 254

Example:

Vector IP address

Network ID Console ID Component ID

90.10. 59. 1(Windows)

Remote panel IP address

Network ID Any number Any number

90.10. 0 - 254 1 - 254

To set Vector’s network and console IDs

1 Tap the Tools menu and choose Settings. The System Settings dialog box opens.
2 Enter the console ID and network ID in the appropriate fields. See “Communication”
page 239.

251
Compulite
Appendix 1

3 Tap OK.

To connect Vector and the remote panel

Connect the remote panel directly to the Control port on Vector’s back panel using a standard
Ethernet cable.

OR
Connect the remote panel via a hub. Use a standard Ethernet cable to connect between the
Control port and the hub’s Uplink port or use a crossed Ethernet cable and connect to one of the
hub’s ordinary ports.

To connect the Pocket PC remote

1 Start the Vector iControl application.

2 Open the View menu, located on the bottom toolbar, and choose Connections.
3 From the Available Consoles combo box, select the target console.
4 Press Connect. When the connection is successful, the disconnected message is replaced by
Connected.

To connect the PC remote

1 Start the Vector Remote Panel application.

2 Move the mouse pointer to the top of the panel to open the menu bar.
3 Open the Application menu and choose Connect.
4 Select the target console.
5 Press OK.

DMX Input
A DMX source, such as a second lighting computer or a manual desk can be connected to the
Vector. DMX input controls all fixture types. DMX input for fixtures is integrated into the main
console output.

To enable DMX input

Go to Tools Settings Communication and tap DMX INPUT ENABLED.

252
 VECTOR
Backups and Peripherals

Art-Net
:

To use Art -Net protocol you must

• Connect the Vector and the Art- Connect the Art-Net device to Vector’s data connector.
Net device. Use regular Ethernet data cable.

• Set the Vector’s network ID. To set the network ID

1 Open the Tools menu.

2 Go to the Communication tab.
3 In Network ID field, enter 2 or 10 depending on
the Art-Net device network setting.

• Enable Art-Net and Set the Art- To enable Art-Net

Net subnet offset.
1 Open the Tools menu.
2 Open the Settings dialog box.
3 Go to the Communication tab.
4 Tap Art-Net Enabled.
When enabled the background is light.
5 Enter an integer from 0 - 15 in Art-Net Subnet
field.
6 Tap OK.
The data is saved and the dialog box closes.

253
Compulite
Appendix 1

254
Appendix 2 The Vector Network
This chapter contains the following sections:
About the Vector network configuration (see page 255)
IP address configuration (see page 256)

About the Vector network configuration

The Vector system is a complex system that consists of several sub-devices that are connected to
each other via an Ethernet 100BaseT network.

Vector’s devices are:

RT CPU board (1 internal. 2 100BaseT ports)
Windows CPU board (1 internal. 2 100BaseT ports)
Editor panel wing (1 internal + remotes)
Playback panel wings (up to 2 internals + remotes)
DMX transmission board (up to 2 internals + possible externals)
MIDI/SMPTE/S2L board (1 internal + possible externals)

Separating devices into networks

To prevent external network-aware devices from interfering with the internal system's data flow,
Vector has one closed network and an open network that affords access to an external network. All
the internal system devices are connected to the internal network.

The RT CPU board (for VC's, MIDI-on-Ethernet, master/slave synchronization, multi-user func-
tionality etc.) and the Windows CPU board (for multi user, file server access, internet access etc.)
must also have an external connection. The Real Time board is connected to the closed internal
network and to a network that is opened for the external devices. The Windows board doesn't need
to be connected to the internal network; it is connected to the opened network and to a general use
network, which could supply an Internet and file server connection. See, Figure 75.

255
Compulite
Appendix 2

Figure 75: Vector’s internal network and back panel Ethernet ports

IP address configuration
It's obvious that in this environment there must be an IP address allocation strategy. Each system
device needs an IP address. Devices’ IP addresses for the internal network’s are factory defined and
cannot be changed by the end user. The devices that also communicate on the second network,
which is exposed to external devices, have user determined IP addresses. The IP address allocation
rules will be as follows:

Real time network

Network
Device IP Address / Range
Interface

RT CPU Board 1 [Link]

Editor Panel Wing 1 [Link] - [Link]

Playbacks Panel Wing 1 [Link] - [Link]

DMX Board 1 [Link] - [Link]

MIDI/SMPTE/S2L 1 [Link] - [Link]

Board

256
 VECTOR
The Vector Network

Outgoing network

Network
Device IP Address / Range
Interface

Windows CPU Board 1 Configurable by the user - the last number in the IP
address must be 1. Example: [Link].
Note: This address is not allowed to be on the [Link]
network.

RT CPU Board 1 The first three numbers of the address are identical to
the Windows board. The last number should be 10.
Example: [Link]

General use network

Network
Device IP Address / Range
Interface

Windows CPU Board 1 Configurable by the user. The address is not allowed to
have the same network address as the first Windows
board network interface.

External panel wings, DMX boards and remotes

When Vector detects a disconnected external device you are prompted to approve the connection. If
approved, Vector sends the device an IP address.

257
Compulite
Appendix 2

258
Appendix 3 Automated playback
Playback can be automated using timelines, MIDI, or SMPTE.

This chapter contains the following sections:

About timelines (see page 259)
Working with MIDI (see page 260)
MIDI tables (see page 264)

About timelines
A timeline is a Vector show object that contains triggering commands for cues, macros, and snaps.
Timeline trigger commands are given specific times.

Automatic activation of cues, macros, and snaps can be triggered from external source SMPTE and
MIDI time codes (MTC) or through Vector’s internal clock.

Figure 76: Editor toolbar in timeline mode

To teach timelines

1 Press SHIFT + TIME. The timeline toolbar opens.

2 Tap TEACH TIMELINE.
3 Connect an external SMPE or MIDI source.

Or
Tap RESTART to restart Vector’s internal clock.

To store timelines

Press SHIFT + TIME, ##, STORE.

To activate timelines

Press SHIFT + TIME, ##, ENTER.

To playback timelines

1 Press SHIFT + TIME and select the timeline number.

2 Connect an external SMPE or MIDI source or tap RESTART to restart Vector’s internal
clock.
3 Tap RUN.

259
Compulite
Appendix 3

To add text to timelines

1 Press SHIFT + TIME and select the timeline number.

2 Press TEXT.
3 Type text in the dialog box’s text field.
4 Press STORE.

To delete timelines

1 Press SHIFT + TIME and select the timeline number.

2 Press DELETE. Vector asks for confirmation.
3 Press DELETE again.

To SHIFT + examine timelines

1 Press EXAM.
2 Press TIME and select the timeline number.
3 Press ENTER. The timeline exam is displayed in the active pane or in the dedicated exam
pane.

Working with MIDI

Vector supports MIDI input/output. You can use MIDI to carry out panel commands, access some
show control functions, and remote triggering for macros.

Note: To use this feature, a MIDI card must be installed. If your Vector is not equipped
with a MIDI card, contact your distributor or Compulite support.

MIDI Show Control (MSC) performs playback operations through MIDI. MSC functioning is
supported for the Master playback only. The supported operations are: Go, Timed-Go, Stop,
Resume, and Fire (trigger). Vector supports MSC’s full frame format.

260
 VECTOR
Automated playback

MIDI settings
MIDI parameter settings are located in the Tools Settings (dialog box), Communication (tab).
See “Communication” page 239.

Buttons/Fields Default

MIDI ENABLED • Disabled - Vector does not receive MIDI transmission. Disabled
• Enabled - Vector receives MIDI transmission.
MIDI KEYS • Disabled - Vector does not receive MIDI keys from an Disabled
ENABLED external MIDI device.
• Enabled - Vector receives MIDI keys from an external
MIDI device.
MIDI MACRO • Disabled - Vector does not receive MIDI macros from an Disabled
ENABLED external MIDI device.
• Enabled - Vector receives MIDI macros from an external
MIDI device.
MIDI Channel Set the MIDI channel. Legal values are from 1 - 16. none
MIDI Code Offset Support for MIDI devices broadcasting notes that are offset. none
Customize note’s number to be system note 1.
MSC ENABLED Enable/disable MSC (MIDI Show Control). Disabled
MSC Device ID Set the system Device ID. The valid range is 0-111. Use 111 none
for ‘AllCall’ DeviceId.
MSC Group ID Set the system Group ID. Legal values are from 112 - 126 none
MSC Peer ID Not implemented yet. none

To enable MIDI

1 Go to Tools Settings. The System Settings dialog box opens.

2 Tap the Communication tab.
3 Tap MIDI ENABLED. The MIDI Channel and MIDI Code Offset fields are now available.
4 Enter the MIDI channel in the MIDI Channel field.
5 (optional) Enter the offset in the MIDI Code Offset field.

MIDI macro
Store MIDI macros by manually entering Note-On, Note-Off values. The Editor toolbar has a MIDI
mode, that you use when programming MIDI macros.

Figure 77: Editor toolbar - MIDI mode

MIDI macros can be attached to cues.

261
Compulite
Appendix 3

Use the usual macro procedures to store, attach, and delete MIDI macros.

To enable Vector for MIDI macros

1 Go to Tools Settings Communication tab.

2 Tap MIDI MACRO ENABLED. Make sure MIDI ENABLED is enabled also.
3 Tap OK. The System Settings dialog box closes.

To store MIDI macros

1 Press MACRO.
2 On the Editor toolbar, tap MIDI MACRO. The Editor toolbar is now in MIDI mode.
3 Tap NOTE ON or NOTE OFF.
4 Enter the note number, required by your MIDI device, on the numeric keypad.
5 Press ENTER.
6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until finished.
7 Store the macro using the usual procedure.

The Editor toolbar has a MIDI mode, that you use when programming MIDI macros.

Figure 78: Editor toolbar - MIDI mode

MIDI macros can be attached to cues.

Use the usual macro procedures to store, attach, and delete MIDI macros.

To enable Vector for MIDI macros

1 Go to Tools Settings Communication tab.

2 Tap MIDI MACRO ENABLED. Make sure MIDI ENABLED is enabled also.
3 Tap OK. The System Settings dialog box closes.

To store MIDI macros

1 On the Editor toolbar, tap MIDI MACRO. The Editor toolbar is now in MIDI mode.
2 Tap NOTE ON or NOTE OFF.
3 Enter the note number, required by your MIDI device, on the numeric keypad.
4 Press ENTER.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until finished.
6 Store the macro using the usual procedure.

262
 VECTOR
Automated playback

Playback operations using MSC

MSC is supported for the master playback only. The functions are:
• Go • Timed Go
• Hold (pause) • Resume
• Fire (trigger)

263
Compulite
Appendix 3

MIDI tables
Table 1: MIDI Note On table

Command Note # Command Note #

TIME 1 STORE+ 39
RELEASE 2 CUE 40
FREE 7 SPOT 41

10 EFFECT 42
ENTER 15 RESET 47
2 17 CHANNEL 48
5 18 EXAM 50
8 19 STAGE 51
9 20 BLIND 52
6 21 UNDO 53
3 22 SETUP 54
HOME 23 COPY 55
@ 24 CUT 56
ZR 25 PASTE 57
ON 26 MOVE 58
FL 27 master pb GO 65
7 28 master pb HOLD 66
4 29 master pb BACK 67
1 30 GOTO 68
0 31 RATE 91
STORE 32 LOCK X 103

arrow right 33 LOCK Y 104

TEXT 35 BO 114
DELETE 36

264
 VECTOR
Automated playback

Table 2: MIDI Note Off table

Command Note # Command Note #

SELECT (faders 1 - 10) 1 - 10 GO 101

SELECT (QKeys 1 - 10 2) 2 SUBMASTER 102

SELECT (fader 3) 3 JOIN 103

SELECT (fader 4) 4 TRIGGER 104

SELECT (fader 5) 5 STEP 105

SELECT (fader 6) 6 106

SELECT (fader 7) 7 || 107

SELECT (fader 8) 8 PAGE UP 108

SELECT (fader 9) 9 PAGE DOWN 109

SELECT (fader 10) 10 LIB DEFINITION 113

SELECT (fader 11) 11 LIBRARY 114

SELECT (fader 12) 12 INTENSITY 115

SELECT (fader 13) 13 POSITION 116

SELECT (fader 14) 14 COLOR 117

SELECT (fader 15) 15 BEAM 118

SELECT (fader 16) 16 IMAGE 119

SELECT (fader 17) 17 SHAPE 120

SELECT (fader 18) 18 SNAP 123

SELECT (fader 19) 18

SELECT (fader 20) 20

arrow down 31

arrow left 32
GROUP 34
QLIST 35
MACRO 90
PRIORITY 100

265
Compulite
Appendix 3

266
Appendix 4 The Device Builder
The device builder is an application used to define devices (personalities). The devices can then be
imported to Vector’s patch manager and used in your show.

This chapter includes the following sections:

About the device builder (see page 267)
Building and editing devices (see page 268)
Saving and importing devices (see page 276)

About the device builder

Tip! Put a shortcut to the Device Builder on your desktop or add the Device Builder to
your Start menu.

Figure 79: The device builder dialog box - device details tab
The left pane shows a list of existing devices. The fields in the right pane tabs are used to edit
existing devices and define new devices

267
Compulite
Appendix 4

Tab What you do here

Device details • Enter the device ID, device name, pan and tilt spans.
• Write remarks.

Parameter Setup • Map parameters to their DMX offset.

• Set step ranges and properties.
• Enter the control channel settings.
• Set external DMX devices (yoke, scroller, etc.)

Wheel Assignments • Map parameters to parameter banks and wheels.

Building and editing devices

The work flow for building devices is:

Name and identify the device. Each device must have a unique tag and identifier.
• Device tags can be up to 12 characters.
• Device IDs can be up to 5 digits.
Note: If you attempt to enter an ID number that is
already in use, an error message is displayed.
Correct the identifier and continue working.

Map parameters to their DMX offsets Consult the manufacturer’s manual for parameters’
and edit parameters. DMX offsets. Devices can have up to 128 DMX
channels.

Set up the wheel assignments. Arrange the wheel assignments and set wheel sensi-
tivity.

To build a new device

1 Make sure that the Device Details tab is on top and the device list workspace is set for your
console (Vector or Rave).
2 Tap NEW located on the upper button bar. The New Device dialog box opens.
3 Type the device’s name in the text field and tap OK. The device is added to the device list
located in the workspace.
4 Under Device Properties, enter a unique identifier in the Device ID field.
5 The text in the Short Name field is the default name for fixtures created from the device.
The short name is automatically generated using the first two letters of the device’s name.
You can change the short name.
6 Under Extra Data, enter the pan and tilt spans. Consult the manufacturer’s specifications
for this information.
7 Vector only! Select the manufacturer from the Manufacturer combo box. If your device’s
manufacturer does not appear in the list, select Generic.

268
 VECTOR
The Device Builder

8 Free text can be typed in the Device Remarks field. Example: Enter dip switch settings.
9 Tap SAVE to save the new device. A message confirming a successful export is displayed.
The file name and path are also displayed. Tap OK to confirm.

To delete a device

Select a device in the workspace device list and tap DELETE.

Mapping parameter types to their DMX offsets

Each parameter must be mapped to its DMX offset. Consult the manufacturer’s specifications for
the correct DMX offsets.

Figure 80: Parameter Setup tab

There may be two or more instances of the same parameter type. Example: a device may have three
color wheels. In this case, the same parameter type is mapped to three DMX offsets. In Parameter
Properties, the parameter names are automatically set as Color Wheel 1, Color Wheel 2, Color
Wheel 3.

To map parameters to DMX offsets

1 Tap the Parameter Setup tab.

2 Drag a icon from the parameter type list and drop it in the map cell that corresponds to its
DMX address (DMX offset). Consult the manufacturer’s specifications for the correct
DMX offset for each parameter.
3 Repeat Step 2 until all the parameters are mapped to their DMX offsets.

269
Compulite
Appendix 4

4 Double click the parameter type icon to open the Parameter Properties dialog box for
parameter editing.
5 To configure the control channel (lamp on, lamp off, reset), tap the control icon located
below the parameter list. See “configure the control parameter” page 275
6 Tap SAVE.

To set up shared DMX offsets

Sometimes different parameter types share the same DMX offset. Example: dimmer and the
shutter share DMX offset 1.
1 Drag the dimmer icon from the parameter list to the cell for offset 1.
2 Drag the shutter icon from the parameter list and drop it in the cell for offset 1.

3 To view all the parameters mapped to offset 1, click the arrow for the drop down list.

Note:

To delete parameters from the DMX offset map

Right click on the parameter and choose DELETE in the fly out menu.

270
 VECTOR
The Device Builder

Editing parameters
After mapping parameters to their DMX offsets, by dragging from the list and dropping in the
appropriate DMX offset cell, you may want to edit the parameter settings.

Figure 81: Parameter properties dialog box

The dialog box title bar shows the selected parameter and its DMX offset.

Field

Type The parameter type determines the default wheel bank assignment.

Name The name of the parameter. This is the text that appears on the Wheel
Assignments display in Vector.

Bank The default wheel bank. Example: all gobo related parameters are auto-
matically assigned to the image wheel bank and all color related param-
eters are assigned to the color wheel bank. The default assignment can
be easily changed.

Invert • Check to invert the parameter.

• Clear to uninvert the parameter.

Exclude from Lib • Check to exclude the parameter from libraries.

• Clear to include the parameter in libraries.

Profile Set the parameter’s behavior during fades.

Priority Set to LTP (Priority) or HTP.

Resolution Choose 8-bit or 16-bit resolution.

LSB Offset Set lowest significant bit for 16-bit resolution.

Edit Steps Buttons for copying, cutting, and pasting steps.

Edit Steps Table Add or delete steps.

271
Compulite
Appendix 4

Field

Offset Home Value Set the home value for the parameter. This is the value the parameter
goes to when you press HOME or RESET. Example: Pan and tilt home
values are usually set to 50% (128 -decimal or in the case of 16-bit
32768)

Mode Set the home value display mode to percent, decimal, hexadecimal.

Step Table Shows the step settings.

To open the Parameter Properties dialog box

Double click on a parameter in the parameter to DMX offset map.

Changing the default wheel assignment

The parameter type, as set in the Parameter Setup tab, determines the icon that represents the
parameter and the default wheel bank assignment. Example: If the parameter type is gobo wheel, it
is automatically assigned to the image wheel bank. If the fixture has only a few parameters, you
may want to change the default wheel assignment and group all parameters in the same wheel bank.

Figure 82: Parameter Properties tab detail

To change the default wheel bank assignment

In the Parameter Setup tab, open the Bank combo box and select another wheel bank

Generating steps

Some parameters, such as dimmer or cyan, have only one step. Other parameters, such as gobo
wheels or color wheels, may have many steps. When building a new device, all parameters initially
have only one step. Add more steps using the Edit StepsTable buttons:

272
 VECTOR
The Device Builder

Button What it does

Build Steps Tap this to define the number of steps. The Step Generator automatically
divides the DMX values (0 - 255) equally among the steps. This can be
edited later.

Add Step Tap this button to add a step at the end of the step list. Added steps must
be further defined in the step generator

Insert Step Tap this button to insert a step above the selected step.

Delete Step Delete the selected step.

After building the number of steps, fill in the Step Table fields:

Field

# (number) Enter the number of steps for this parameter.

Name The name of the step. For example, you might name a step in the gobo
wheel ‘Starburst’.

Discrete • No - There is continuous control between steps. This is the default

setting.
• Yes - There is not continuous control between steps. When setting
values using the wheel, the value jumps from step to step without any
intermediate values.

Stopper • No - There is no stopper between steps. This is the default setting.

• Yes - There is a stopper between steps. Use STEP UP and STEP
DOWN to move past the stoppers.

From (minimum) The DMX start value for the range of steps.

To (maximum) The DMX end value for the range of steps.

To build steps

1 Open the Parameter Properties dialog box.

2 Tap BUILD STEPS. The Step Generator opens.
3 Fill in the fields in the Step Generator.
4 Tap BUILD STEPS to overwrite the current step table.

To add steps

1 Tap ADD STEP. The new step is added to the end of the step table. The added step is
labelled New.
2 Manually enter the settings for discrete, stopper, and DMX values range.

To insert steps

1 Tap a step to select it.

273
Compulite
Appendix 4

2 Tap INSERT STEP. The new step is added above the selected [Link] added step is
labelled New.
3 Manually enter the settings for discrete, stopper, and DMX values range.

OR
1 Tap a step to select it.
2 Tap BUILD STEPS. The Step Generator opens.
3 Fill in the fields in the Step Generator.
4 Tap INSERT STEP RANGE. The new steps are added above the selected [Link] new
steps are labelled Step 1, Step 2, etc.

To delete steps

Tap a step to select it and tap DELETE STEP. The number of steps is automatically adjusted to
accommodate the deletion.

IMPORTANT! The DMX offsets are NOT automatically reconfigured when you delete
a step.

Editing steps

To add a text tags to steps

Click the step and type the new text.

To change DMX values

Click the Min or Max for the step and type the new values.

To copy or cut a step

1 In the Step Table, stand on the step’s name.

2 Tap COPY or CUT.

OR
In the Step Table, stand on the step’s name, right click, and choose COPY or CUT.

To paste a step

In the Step Table, stand on a cell where you intend to paste the step, and tap PASTE.

OR
In the Step Table, stand on the cell where you intend to paste step, right click, and choose
PASTE.

Note: The pasted step overwrites the all existing information.

274
 VECTOR
The Device Builder

Configuring the control parameter

The control parameter controls the lamp on, lamp off, and reset functions of the fixture. These func-
tions are accessed via the control function on the console. The control parameter is not controlled
by a wheel, therefore it has no wheel assignment. The control parameter is configured in a special
dialog box.

Figure 83: Control Properties dialog box

To configure the control parameter

1 Go to the Parameter Setup tab.

2 Open the Control Properties dialog box by tapping the control icon below the parameter
list.
3 Check the Use Control check box.
4 In the Offset field, enter the control channel’s DMX offset.

Or
Check Broadcast on all offsets.
5 In the Return Value field, enter the return value. Sometimes, the return value is called the
safe value. The return value is usually 0.
6 In the Name column, type the step names such as: Lamp ON, Reset, Lamp OFF.
7 In the Value column, fill in the step’s DMX value. Example: The DMX value for Martin
fixtures’ Lamp ON for is 228; the DMX value for High End fixtures’ Reset is 64.
8 In the Time column, enter in the number of seconds the value is sent. This is usually 6
seconds.

275
Compulite
Appendix 4

To remove a wheel assignment

Select the parameter and drag it to the trash can or right click on the parameter and choose
Delete from the fly out menu.

Saving and importing devices

The buttons on the function button bar control where new and modified devices are saved and allow
importing devices to the device library.

Figure 84: Function buttons

Button What it does

NEW Define a new device.

SAVE Save the selected device. When a new device is saved its name and
ID number are added to the IdToNameTable, an automatic Excel
file that is stored in the device library folder.
SAVE IN Convert a Vector device for use with Rave or a Rave defined device
for use with Vector.
IMPORT TO LIBRARY Import a device definition from an external file to the device library
folder.
DELETE Use to delete a device.
DIRECTORY New and modified devices are saved to the directory shown here.
ABOUT Shows the current Device Builder version.

276
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and
other controls

How is this glossary organized?

The console key section is organized alphabetically, with symbol keys at the beginning.
Controls, other than keys, appear at the end of the console key section.
The touch screen buttons are organized by Editor toolbar mode. The Editor toolbar modes are
organized alphabetically.
Shift pairs are organized alphabetically.

Console keys

For range selections. Example: SPOT 1 10. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, this key function as
‘Tab’ on a keyboard. See “Using console keys in window mode” page 12

/
Use for customized selections. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, this key is still available.

@
Set the numeric keypad for intensity or parameter value assignment. When SCROLL WIN is
enabled, this key opens Windows’ Start menu.

+
(plus) An “and” key for fixture selection. Example: CHANNEL 1 + 5 + 11. When SCROLL WIN is
enabled, this key is still available.

—
(minus) An “except” key for fixture selection. Example: SPOT 1 10 — 8. When SCROLL WIN is
enabled, this key is still available.

277
Compulite

(dot, decimal point) Used for point cues, time assignments that are not whole numbers. When
SCROLL WIN is enabled, this key is still available.

Pause a fade on the selected fader or restart a paused fade.

0 -> 9
Use for numeric entries. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, these keys are still available.

A
The fader that controls the incoming values for cues running on the A/B crossfader.

ACTIVE
Open the Editor toolbar in active mode.

AUTO
When active, macros and snaps attached to cues are automatically triggered when the fade to the
cue begins. When LED is on, triggering is disabled.

B
The fader that controls the outgoing values for cues running on the A/B crossfader.

B.O.
Black out all dimmer output.

BACK
Go to the previous memory on the master playback device.

BEAM
Switch to the beam wheel bank. Store or select a beam library.

BLIND
Go to the blind editor. In blind mode you can program or modify memories without disturbing the
output on stage.

CE
Regressively clears the last entry in the command line. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, this key
functions like ‘backspace’ on a keyboard.

CHANNEL
Set the keypad for channel selection. This key also acts as an “and” key when used between channel
selections. Press twice to set Channel the number default selection.

COLOR
Switch to the color bank wheel bank. Store or select a color library.

278
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

COPY
Copy parameter values and all types of objects.

CUE
Select, store, modify, and erase cues. Press twice to set Cue as the number default selection. Open
the Editor toolbar in cue mode

CUT
Remove an item from its location and put it on the clipboard for pasting. Operate with SHIFT.

DELETE
Delete objects (cues, libraries, groups, etc.).

DIM
Patch fixtures to dimmers from the console panel without opening the Patch Manager. Open the
Editor toolbar in patch mode.

EDITORS
Not implemented yet.

EFFECT
Open the Effect Editor dialog box. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, this key is ‘Ctrl’.

ENTER
Convert a selected memory to a group of fixtures in the editor, preserving the fixtures' levels. Apply
a library to selected fixtures. End a command sequence. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, this key
function like ‘Enter’ on a keyboard.

EXAM
Display exams in the active pane.

FAN
Apply spread values to spot parameters and channels according to the selection order. A wheel is
used to assign the spread.

FREE
Free assignments on playback devices.A double hit locks FREE allowing you to free multiple
assignments. See “Shift pairs” page 294

FULL
Set dimmer channels and spot parameters to 100%.

GO
(master playback) Initiate a fade on the master playback device.

279
Compulite

GO
(all playback devices except the master playback) Initiate a fade on selected playback devices.
See “Shift pairs” page 294

GO TO
On the master playback device, interrupt a fade in progress and immediately initiate a fade to the
next cue in the sequence.

GROUP
Program, select, and delete groups.

HIGHLIGHT
Isolate fixtures for viewing and/or editing.

HOLD
Pause fades running on the master playback device.

HOME
Assign home values to all parameters in the selected spots. Home values are part of a device’s defi-
nition as defined in the Device Builder.

IMAGE
Switch to the image wheel bank. Store or select an image library.

INTENSITY
Switch to the intensity wheel bank. Store or select an intensity library.

JOIN
Link playback devices so they respond simultaneously to a single operational command. See “Shift
pairs” page 294

LIB
Open the Editor toolbar in library mode. Select a library category.

MACRO 101
Triggers macro 101

MACRO 102
Triggers macro 102

MACRO 103
Triggers macro 103

MACRO 104
/triggers macro 104

280
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

MACRO 105
Triggers macro 105

MACRO 106
Triggers macro 106

MOUSE
Set the trackball for mouse functionality. When the trackball is acting as a mouse the ellipsoidal key
pair functions as left and right mouse buttons.

NEXT
When programming a new cue, assign the next available whole number to the cue. Select the next
fixture number, incrementing the last selection by one. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, this is ‘Page
Up’.

ON
Set the selected parameter’s level to this keys’ default value, usually 50%. The default value is set
in the System Settings dialog box, Behavior tab.

ON
(playback control) Not implemented yet.

PARK
Set a constant output for DMX channels. Operate with SHIFT.

PASTE
Paste from the clipboard to the target object.

PB/KEY DISPLAY
Toggle playback wing displays between faders and QKeys.

PB RELEASE
Blackout the output from the selected playback device.

PLAYBACK
Sets the motorized faders as intensity masters.

POSITION
Switch to the position wheel bank. Store and select a position library.

PREVIOUS
Select the previous fixture number; the last number selected is decremented by one whole number.
When SCROLL WIN is enabled, this is ‘Page Down’.

PRIORITY
(playback control) Not implemented yet.

281
Compulite

QLIST
Select QLists. A double hit on this key sets QList as the numeric default selection.

RATE
(fader mode) Sets the motorized faders as rate masters.

RATE
(playback device control) Change the rate for the selected playback devices.

RESET
Clear the editor of active and selected fixtures. See “Shift pairs” page 294

SCROLL WIN
Set the intensity wheel and the numeric keypad to windows mode. In windows mode, the intensity
wheel functions as a scroll wheel. See “Using console keys in window mode” page 12

SELECT
Load faders or QKeys. Store cues to QLists loaded to faders or QKeys. Apply a playback command
to a fader or QKey.

SEQ
Toggle the cue sequencing on or off for the selected playback device.

SET
Select the channel, spot, or matrix set.

SETUP
Open the Setup dialog box to change QLists to chasers, determine chaser settings, and change
default functions for faders and fader control keys.

SHAPE
Switch to the shape wheel bank. Store or select shape libraries.

SHIFT
This key accesses the secondary function for console keys that control two functions. Use in combi-
nation with other keys for expanded functionality. See “Shift pairs” page 294. When SCROLL WIN
is enabled, this key is still available.

SNAP
Program, select, operate, and delete snaps.

SNAP GO
Operate the next snap. This key has a protected mode to prevent accidental operation.

SNEAK
Fade a cue or a fixture in default or selected sneak time.

282
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

SOLO
Blackout all dimmer output except the output from the selected playback device.

SPOT
Set the numeric keypad for spot selection. This key also acts as an “and” key when used between
spot selections. Press twice to set the number default selection to Spot.

STAGE
Not implemented yet.

STEP
When enabled, manually step through a chaser.

STORE
Concludes a command string when storing new objects. Open the Editor toolbar in store mode.

STORE+
Store the editor as the next cue in the QList loaded to the master playback. If there is no QList
loaded to the master playback, STORE+ creates a new QList and automatically loads it to the
master playback.

SUBMASTER
Set the selected fader as an inhibitive submaster.

TEXT
Attach text to objects; use the text keyboard to type text in the Text dialog box.

TIME
Open the Editor toolbar in cue time mode. Set fade times for cues.

UNDO
A regressive restore to previous editor values. Restore deleted objects, such as cues, snaps,
libraries, etc.

UPDATE
Save modifications to existing cues, groups, or snaps. Open the Update Items dialog box.

PAN LOCK
(located next to trackball) Lock the pan axis. When MOUSE is enabled, this key is used as the left
mouse button.

TILT-LOCK
(located next to trackball) Lock the tilt axis. When MOUSE is enabled, this key is used as the right
mouse button.

283
Compulite

ZERO
Force selected parameter levels to zero (zr).

PLAYBACK DEVICE (FADER OR QKEY) CONTROL KEYS

(located under the SELECT keys) Used for playback commands. Note: These keys are blank. These
keys are programmable in the Setup dialog box. The default function is GO (upper key) and HOLD
(lower key).

WHEEL BANK AND PARAMETER KEY PAIRS

(located above the horizontal wheels) Pressing the left key of each pair moves from bank to bank.
Use the right key of each pair to select the parameter.

Other console controls

ARROW KEYS
(located above trackball) Use to traverse spreadsheets. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, these keys
function are still available.

BUMP BUTTONS
Bump buttons (flash keys) are programmable in the Setup dialog box. The default function is
Flash.

GRAND MASTER
Controls the dimmer output level for the entire console.

HORIZONTAL WHEELS
5 wheels for fixture parameters, effect attributes, and fade rate control.

MOTORIZED FADERS
Control the intensity level or fade rate of cues running on the faders.

TRACKBALL
Controls the pan and tilt parameters. When MOUSE is enabled, the trackball operates as a mouse.

VERTICAL WHEEL
There is one vertical wheel used for intensity values. When SCROLL WIN is enabled, this wheel
scrolls the active pane,

284
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

Editor toolbar modes and buttons

Default buttons
These buttons are available when the editor is idle and you are using Enter syntax.

EDIT CUE
Go to the selected cue on a playback device and enter the levels to the editor. Include only the
fixtures and levels stored in the cue.

LOAD CUE
Open the selected cue in the editor. Include only the fixtures and levels stored in the cue.

LOAD STATE
Open the selected cue for editing. Include the fixtures and levels stored in the cue and all fixtures
and levels that are tracking.

LIBRARY
Set Vector for library selection.

Note: This button is available when using Enter or Action syntax.

EDIT LIBRARY
Open the selected library for editing.

PATCH

Active mode
These buttons are available after pressing ACTIVE.

STAGE
Grabs fixtures visible on stage.

EDITOR
Grabs fixtures in editor.

MASTER PB
Grabs fixtures on master playback.

INVISIBLE PARAMETERS
Grabs parameters that are invisible because the fixtures’ dimmers are at zr.

INACTIVE
Grabs everything not active on the playback devices or in the editor.

285
Compulite

EVERYTHING
Grabs all visible and invisible output.

=@
Grabs parameters set to the specified level.

<@
Grabs parameters set to less than the specified level.

>@
Grabs parameters set to more than the specified level.

Cue mode
These buttons are available after pressing CUE.

CUE ONLY
Tracking mode only. The value(s) are for the current cue only. On the fade to the next cue, values
return to the tracking.

EDIT CUE
Load only the cue to the editor for modification.

LOAD CUE

LOAD STATE

SKIP
Tracking mode only. On fade to the next cue, do not use the skipped values and revert to the previ-
ously tracked values.

BACKTRACK

BLOCK
Tracking mode only. Restart tracking at the block cue.

UNBLOCK
Tracking mode only. Cancel the block cue and reinstate tracking.

LINK
Link non-sequential cues.

286
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

LOOP
Set loop options.

STORE OPTIONS
Choose a store option.

MARK CUE
Tracking mode only.

FORCE BLACK CUE

Set the selected cue as a force black cue.

PROFILE
Assign a fade profile to the selected parameter.

DELTA
Switch the Editor toolbar to Delta mode.

TRACK SHEET

Delta mode
These buttons are available after tapping DELTA, which appears in the selection toolbar.
(See “Every (selection filter) mode” page 288)

RELATIVE
Use the delta’s relative values when pasting.

ABSOLUTE
Use the delta’s absolute values when pasting.

ADD NEW
If the delta contains fixtures that do not appear in the original cue, add them when pasting.

COPY NEW DELTA

Store the parameter levels as a delta.

PASTE
Overwrite the values in a cue with the new values in the delta.

287
Compulite

Dimmer (patch) mode

These buttons are available after pressing DIM.

CLEAR PATCH
Clear the patch assignments for the selected dimmer or channel.

EXTERNAL DIMMER
Assign external dimmer. This is used with devices such as yokes and scrollers or nay device
needing an external dimmer patch to operate.

PARK
Set a dimmer at park.

PROPORTIONAL LEVEL
Set a proportional level for the selected dimmer.

CLEAR PROPORTIONAL LEVEL

Return the proportional level setting to 100%.

Every (selection filter) mode

These buttons are available after selecting fixtures and tapping EVERY.

ODDS
Select odd numbered fixtures within the requested range.

EVENS
Select the even numbered fixtures within the requested range.

3RD
Select every third fixture within the requested range.

4TH
Select every fourth fixture within the selected range.

/ (SLASH)
Advance selection by a specified increment.

INTERSECT
not implemented yet.

INVERT ALL
not implemented yet.

INVERT RANGE
not implemented yet.

288
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

Fan mode
These buttons are available after pressing FAN.

SPREAD NEGATIVE

Fixture selection mode

These buttons are available after pressing CHANNEL, SPOT, GROUP, or SET.

LAST SELECTION
Re-select the last selection.

ALL EDITOR
Select the entire editor output.

EVERY
Display additional selection options.

USED IN SHOW
View all patched fixtures that have been used in the show, i.e. stored in cues or groups.

FREE IN SHOW
View all patched fixtures that have been not been used in the show, i.e. not stored in cues or groups.

FLIP
Flip pan and tilt, for the selected fixtures, 180 degrees.

[Link].
Black out the dimmer for all fixtures except the selected fixture.

PAN/TILT PATCH
Open pan/tilt toolbar

289
Compulite

PARAM GROUPING
Toggle the parameter grouping feature on or off.

TORE OPTIONS
Switch the Editor toolbar to the Store Options mode.

PROFILE
Display profile options.

CONTROL
Ignite the selected fixtures

LOOK AHEAD MASK

Define which fixtures and parameters are affected by the LookAhead feature.

DELTA
Store parameter levels in a delta or paste the delta for quick cue modification.

Library mode
These buttons are available after tapping LIBRARY or pressing LIB.

FIXTURE SPECIFIC
This type of library can be applied only to the specific fixtures stored in the library.

DEVICE SPECIFIC
This type of library can be applied to fixtures of the same device type.

PATTERN
This type of library is analogous to effects and is applied sequentially, as a repeating pattern, to
fixtures.

LIBRARY NUMBER
?Set the command sequence to recognize the next number entered as a library identifier.

TRACKING
The library is tracked for global cue modification. This is the default.

ALL FOR SELECTED BANK

All parameters belonging to the same bank as the active parameter are stored in the library. Not
implemented yet.

INCLUDE TIME
Time assignments for the selected parameter will be included in the library.

290
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

INCLUDE EFFECT
Effects running on the selected parameter will be included in the library

BANK FILTERS OFF

Include all active parameters in the library.

Loop mode
These buttons are available after selecting a range of cues and tapping LOOP.

AUTO LOOP
Pressing GO for the first cue in the loop initiates the entire loop. This is the default.

MANUAL LOOP
Requires a GO command for each cue in the loop sequence.

AUTO FOLLOW
When reaching the end of a loop sequence there is an automatic fade to the following cue.

LOOP COUNT
When the number of loops is specified, this button is lit.

Macro mode
These buttons are available after pressing MACRO.

TEACH MACRO
All subsequent key presses are collected in a macro.

MIDI MACRO

Pan/Tilt mode
These buttons are available after tapping PAN/TILT PATCH. Use them for orienting the pan and tilt directions to
trackball movement.

INVERT PAN
Switch the full and zero values for pan.

INVERT TILT
Switch the full and zero values for tilt.

SWAP PAN/TILT
Pan becomes tilt and tilt becomes pan.

291
Compulite

Parameter (setting levels) mode

These buttons are available after selecting fixtures and a parameter.

STEP UP
Move step indexed parameter from current step to next step.

STEP DOWN
Move step indexed parameter from current step to previous step.

+@
Add a specified value to the selected parameter’s level.

-@
Subtract a specified value from the selected parameter’s level.

FLIP
Reverse the x and y axes 180 degrees.

REM DIM

PAN/TILT PATCH
Opens the pan/tilt patch options.

BLOCK
On the fade, ignore the previous values for the selected channel or parameter.

PROFILE
Display the profile options. The profile determines parameter behavior during fades.

DELTA
Open the delta options toolbar - See “Delta mode” page 287

STORE OPTIONS

Profile mode
These buttons are available after selecting a cue and tapping PROFILE or selecting a cue, pressing TIME, and then
tapping PROFILE.

JUMP ON START
Parameters jump to their new values at the start of the fade.

JUMP ON END
Parameters jump to their new values at the end of the fade.

292
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

JUMP ON 50%
Parameters jump to their new values when the fade has completed 50% of its allotted time.

Rate mode
These buttons are available after pressing RATE.

FREEZE ALL
Stop all chases and effects.

FREEZE CHASE
Stop chases.

FREEZE EFFECT
Stop effects.

Store options
These buttons are available after selecting a cue.

ALL EDITOR (RED + WHITE)

All fixture values in the editor are stored in the cue.

ACTIVE ONLY (RED)

Only fixture values selected in the editor are stored in the cue

ALL STAGE
The entire lighting state is stored in the cue.

ALL PARAMS FOR SELECTED

All parameter values for the selected (displayed in red) spots if the dimmer intensity for the fixture
is more than zr.

ALL PARAMS IF ACTIVE

All parameter values for the active (displayed in red or white) spots if the dimmer intensity for the
fixture is more than zr

Time mode
These buttons are available after pressing TIME.

TIME-IN
Set the fade in time for all or selected parameters fading to higher values.

TIME-OUT
Set the fade time for the all or selected parameters fading to lower values begin their fade.

293
Compulite

DELAY-IN
Set a delay time for parameters fading to higher values.

DELAY-OUT
Set a delay time for parameters fading to lower values

WAIT
Display the wait options.

FOLLOW ON
Fade to the next cue without waiting for a go command.

MANUAL
The fade requires a go command.

PROFILE
Display the profile options.

Timeline mode
These buttons are available after pressing SHIFT+TIME.

TEACH TIME LINE

RUN

STOP

SET TIME

RESTART
Restart Vector’s internal clock

CLEAR

Shift pairs
SHIFT + ACTIVE
Grab fixtures without specifying the source.

294
 VECTOR
Glossary for keys, buttons, shift pairs, and other controls

SHIFT + FREE
Free all playback devices.

SHIFT + GO
(all playback devices except the master playback) Initiate a fade on all loaded playback devices.

SHIFT + JOIN
Link all playback devices so they respond simultaneously to a single operational command.

SHIFT + RESET
Completely reset the editor. Until this type of reset is requested, the last fixture selection is still
under wheel control.

SHIFT + SNAP GO
Operate the previous snap.

SNAP # + SHIFT + ENTER

Operate the snap in snap add mode.

SHIFT + TIME
Open the Editor toolbar in timeline mode.

295
Compulite

296
Index

A track sheet 95
chasers
A/B
rate 155
display 145
chases 157
A/B crossfader 134
direction 158
priority 136
jump 160
A/B crossfaer patterns 157
dip mode 134 rate 159
absolute values 77 shadow chase 158
action syntax 11, 234 xfade 160
active 65, 82, 278 clear 57
active in editor 35 clearing
active on stage 35 patch 51, 55
active snap 161 proportional patch 56
add tabs 38 clock 7, 13
animated graphics 227, 228 collapse 47
art -net 253 color 74, 171, 278
picker 76
attachment viewer 30
color code
attachments 37
fader LEDs 133
auto 278 master playback output 140
auto follow loops 113 output 71
automatic groups 67 playback wing 135
automatic libraries 172 command line 13, 67
automatic trigger 162, 187 gm status 13
progress bar 13
SMPTE indication 15
B system clock 13
communication defaults 239
B.O. 278
Compulite mode 234
back 139, 158, 278
context sensitive keys 30
back time 237
control 72, 73
back track 98
copy 279
base 202
copying 18
beam 74, 171, 278
cues 97
behavior 234 delta 104
blackout 143 groups 70, 164
blind 121, 278 libraries 176
block 108 macros 187
QLists 89
cue 279
C cue only 98
calibrate display 5 cues 89, 91
camera viewer 30 block 108
ce 278 copying 97
cue only 98, 108
channel 278
default cue time 110
patch exam 60
deleting 94
channels 63 enter to editor 109
examining 57 examining 95
testing 56 force black 221
 home 81 dimmers
linking 115 patching 45
mark cue 220 testing 56
modifying 101 dip 134
point cues 92 display
storing 90 active snap 161
storing on sks 93 add tabs 38
temporary 118 calibrate 5, 239
unblock 108 new view pane 23
updating 97 parameter values 34
customize dialog box 33 displays
cut 279 channels 28
cutting 18 collapse 47
editor toolbar 37
improve performance 238
D LiveMode 35
defaults master playback 22
back time 237 navigation 24
command line 14 open layout 36
cue fade time 237 pane title bar 23
cue time 110 patched fixtures 35
exam pane 36 playback devices 29, 144
exam view 24 playback indications 145
fader commands 134 QKeys 29
fader controls 135 save layout 36
library modes 178 soft keys 22
QList 87 spots 28
sneak time 218 toolbars 30
stage values 72 used in show 35
system settings 233 wheel assignments 38
windows set up 23
delay in 110
DMX
delay out 110
addresses 49
delete 279 examine 60
deleting 16 ports 46
cues 94 properties dialog box 53
fixtures 51 test offset 56
groups 69 DMX input 252
libraries 175
duty cycle 197
macros 186
QLists 88
snaps 163
E
delta 103
copy 104 editor 83, 109
options 103 restore values 19
desk lights 6 editor toolbar 37
display 30, 37
device builder 53, 73
editors 15
device specific library 177
effects 171, 195
devices
base 202
Hippotizer 247
duty cycle 197
importing 47
effect editor 195
dialog boxes 25 fixture grouping 207
reset position 25 include base 198
dim 54, 279 offset 197, 207
dimmer 54 pattern 197
dimmer curve 53 primitive 199
rate 197
 size 204 fixture specific library 177
storing 198 fixtures
swing 202 patched 35
wave 196 sets 48
enter 279 usage 96
enter syntax 11, 234 used in show 35
Ethernet 255 flip 79
ethernet follow on cues 110, 220
master/slave 250 force black cues 221
evens 65 format menu 34
every 65 free 279
exam 279 freeing playback devices 138
exam displays 24 full 78, 279
examining
channel patch fixture
patch exam 60 G
channels 57, 95 general master
cues 95 status 13
DMX port 60 generral master 143
fixture patch 60
go 139, 143, 279, 280
groups 70
highlight palette 216 go key 140
libraries 176 go to 280
lowlight palette 216 gobo 76
macros 186 picker 76
patch 57 goto 139
QLists 88
grab new values 98
snaps 164
spots 57, 95 grand master 53, 236
exiting application 31 grid properties 27, 40
external devices 257 group 280
external dimmer 49 groups 67
adding text 69
external dimmers 49, 50, 56
automatic 67
external screens 4 copying 70, 164
deleting 69
examining 70
F load to fader 138
fade rates 154 modifying 70
fade time 110 storing 69
fade times 110, 237
parameter profiles 228
H
faders 134
default controls 135 hardware 238, 255
definitions 148 highlight 280
paging 135 examining palette 216
priority 137 programming palette 216
fan 116, 198, 279 updating libraries 217
setting 117 using 214
timing 118 Hippotizer 247
file management 7 hold 139, 280
fixture 63 home 78, 80, 280
settings 52 home cue 81
fixture grouping 207 htp 151
fixture mode 50, 63
I modifying 181
parameter grouping 79
ignite 72 pattern 177
image 74, 76, 171, 280 storage mode 177
importing devices 47 tracking 177
inactive 84 types 171
include base 198 updating 217
indications 145 library
updating all 98
indications bar 14, 33
linking cues 115
inhibitive submaster 141
live display 32
input values 235
parameters 235 LiveMode menus 35
installing software 7 loading
file conversion 169
intensity 74, 75, 171, 280
layouts 25
interactive fixture selection 66 playback devices 138
invert orientation 48 show files 168
invisible parameters 84 snaps 162
IP address 251 localization 7
IP address allocation 256 lock windows 24, 36
LookAhead 213, 219
loops 113
J auto follow 113
join 141, 280 manual 113
jump displays 32 on go 159
lowlight
examining palette 216
K programming palette 216
using 215
keyboard 7
ltp 136
keyboard equivalents 12

L M
M dimmer. See also, intensity
lamp off 72
macros
lamp on 72
adding text 186
last selection 64 copying 187
layout deleting 186
save 36 examining 186
layouts timeline 259
load 36 trigger automatically 162, 187
loading 25 manual fades 110
saving 25 manual loops 113
LCD displays 6 mark cue 220
Lee Designers 76 master pb 83
lib 172, 280 master pb only 98
libraries 172 master playback 139, 144
adding text 175 color code 140
automatic 172 display 145
copying 176
master/slave 249
deleting 175
device specific 177 matrix 28, 224
effects 198 animated graphics 227, 228
examining 176 patch 48
fixture specific 177 menu bar 21
include base for effects 198 menus
 format 34 palette 171
LiveMode 35 pan 75
tools 33 orientation 48, 79
view 32 pan lock 283
windows
parameter grouping 79
add 36
parameters 73
Micron 4D 169
absolute values 77
MIDI 240, 260 home 80
modifying home cue 81
cues 101 home values 72
groups 70 LookAhead 219
libraries 181 mark cue 219
mouse 281 pre-position 219
buttons 11 profiles 228
external 7 release 80
trackball 11 set fade times 111
MSC 240, 260 set position 75
set values 75
steps 75
N types 74
wheels 73
navigation toolbar 24
park 58, 281
network 251
paste 281
new show 31
pasting 18
new to master pb 98
patch
new values 98
external dimmers 56
next 281
patch manager 45
numeric keypad clearing patch 51
set values 77 creating fixtures 48
deleting fixtures 51
importing devices 47
O modifying fixture settings 52
odds 65 opening 33, 46
offset patch interval 49
effects 207 patching fixtures 48
sets 48
on 78, 142, 234, 281
toolbar 46
opening workspace 46
grid properties 32, 41
patching 45, 54
new show 31
applying patch 51
patch manager 33, 46
external dimmers 49
show 31
fixture mode 50
topo view 189
matrix 48
operation mode proportional patch 56
Compulite 234 scrollers 50
tracking 234 sets 48
options dialog box 33 pausing playback 143
ordered priority 137 pb release 142, 281
Ovation 4D 31, 169 pb/key display 281
pb/qkey 29
P pickers 76
playback 281
paging
controls 148
exclude fader from 151
faders 135 playback devices 29, 133
QKeys 136 control groupings 153
soft keys 39 displays 144
 loading 138 command line 14
properties 148 editor 72
Pocket PC 251 fixture 73
point cues 92 test mode 57
position 74, 171, 281 restarting playback 143
power switch 4 reverse playback 143
previous 281 Roscolux 76
primitive 199 RT interface 7
printing 170
priority 141 S
A/B crossfader 136
ltp 136 Sabre 31, 169
options 136 saving
ordered 137 layouts 25
profiles 228 show 31
programming screen captures 2
mark cue 220 scroll win 12, 282
with libraries 182 scrollers 50, 56
progress bar 13 select 282
properties select key 87
playback 148 selecting 65
proportional patch 53, 56 active 83
evens 65
every 65
Q fixtures 63
QKeys 136, 150 from editor 83
display 147 interactive 66
displays 29 last selection 64, 65, 66
priority 136 on touch screen 66
range of fixtures 64
QList 282
reset 64
QLists sets 63
copying 89
selection
defaults 87
interactive 32
deleting 88
examining 88 selection order 198
opening new 87 seq 282
text tags 88 sequence 141
sets
examining 57
R setup 282
rate 282 setup desklights 6
chases 155, 159 shadow chase 158
effects 155, 197
shape 74, 171, 282
global 154, 155
shift 282
rate master 151
show 27
real time 255
shutdown 8
real time status 33
size 204
rear panel 3
skip 106
release 57, 150
SMPTE 15
releasing
fixtures and parameters 80, 101 snap 282
rem dim 217 snap go 162, 282
remote panels 257 snaps 160
active 161
reset 57, 282
 examining 164 T
exclude from 151
trigger 162 temporary cues 118
sneak 218, 236, 282 testing 56
sneak time 218 text 16, 283
cues 94
soft keys 38
groups 69
context sensitive 30
libraries 175
paging 39
macros 186
storing cues 93
QLists 88
toggle display 38
snaps 163
solo 142, 150, 283 temporary cues 120
split crossfaders 153 text conventions 1
spot 283 tilt 75
spots 63 orientation 48
examining 57 tilt lock 283
flip 79
tilt orientation 79
ignition 72
position 75 time 110, 283
track sheet 95 time in 110
stage 83 time out 110
step 75, 142, 150, 283 timeline 15, 259
stop 158 timing 171
store 283 title bar 23
store options 93 toolbars
store+ 235, 283 customize 30
displays 30
storing 18
format 34
cues 90
LiveMode 35
cues and QLists 92
patching 46
effects 198
view menu 32
groups 69
window setup 36
highlight palette 216
lowlight palette 216 tools menu 33
macros 185 topo 189, 241
options 93 node 30
with select key 87 stage dimensions 189
submaster 141, 283 touch screens
swing 202 adding screens 4
calibrating 5, 239
syntax
selecting fixtures 66
action 234
enter 234 track sheet 95, 96
system settings trackball 11, 75
behavior 234 tracking library 171, 177
communication 239 tracking mode 234
customizing 233 block cue 108
default fade times 110 cue only 108
default stage values 72 skip 106
general 233 unblock cue 108
go key 140
hardware 238
master slave 250 U
opening 33 unblock 108
timing 237
undo 19, 97, 283
topo 241
update 283
update all libs 98
updates dialog box 33
updating 18
back track 98
cue only 98
cues 97
dialog box 18
grab new values 98
master pb only 98
new to master pb 98
new values 98
software 33
update all libs 98
used in show 65

V
vertical wheel 12, 73
video 37
view menu 32
view panes 23
voltage selector 3

W
wait 110
wave 196
wheel assignments 30, 38
wheel banks 74
wheels
fine resolution 74
last selection 66
parameters 73
vertical 73
windows 255
new 24
title bar 23
windows setup 23
workspace 26
collapse 47
mode 47
patch manager 46
show 27

Y
yokes 56

Z
zero 78, 284